EASY 
 INTRODUCTORY 
 
 'HEBREW GRAMMAR. 
 

A NEW 
 
 ELEMENTARY GRAMMAR 
 
 OF (WHAT IS US DALLY CALLED) THE 
 
 'HEBREW LANGUAGE 
 
 OF THE OLD TESTAMENT. 
 
 [SECOND EDITION OF PART I. (ON THE READING), 
 
 TOOETHER WITH 
 
 A SHORT AND EASY GRAMMAR 
 
 IN THE FORM OF 
 
 'READING-LESSONS' AND 'NOTES'], 
 
 For SELF-INSTRUCTORS, and for COLLEGES and SCHOOLS. 
 
 P. H. MASON, M.A., 
 
 ONE OF THE SENIOR FELLOWS AND HEBREW LECTURER AND SENIOR DEAN 
 
 of ST. John's college, Cambridge. 
 
 CAMBRIDGE :— J. HALL & SON; 
 
 LONDON : WHITTAKER <fc CO ; SIMFK1N, MARSHALL & CO. ; AND 
 G. BELL & SONS. — OXFORD : JAS. PARKER & CO. 
 
 1877. 
 [Entered at Stationers' Hall]. 
 
1 
 
 Co i\% gttmorj) of 
 
 MY FATHER, 
 
 WHO 
 TAUGHT ME HEBREW FROM EARLY CHILDHOOD 
 
 AND SPARED NO EXPENCE 
 
 IN OBTAINING FOR ME THE BEST INSTRUCTION, 
 
 THESE PAGES 
 
 ARE 
 
 GRATEFULLY INSCRIBED. 
 
PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION, 
 
 The First Edition of pages 1 — 51 of this book (pub- 
 lished at the beginning of the year 1871) being very nearly ex- 
 hausted, the author be^s leave to offer his best thanks to those 
 who have made it necessary for him to bring out a Second 
 Edition of it now. 
 
 The ' Easy, Practical Hebrew Grammar,' (in 2 vols. 8vo.,) 
 published by him in connection with his friend the late 
 Dr. Bernard at the close of the year 1853, was out of print in 
 1870 and the author was then called upon for a new Edition 
 of that Work. But he preferred to write a new book. 
 
 The First Edition (of pages 1 — 51 of this present work) 
 was intended to be merely the First Part of a large Grammar 
 entering into all the minutiaB of the subject in order. And the 
 MS. of a portion of Part II. of the Grammar had been 
 in the Printers' hands for several days when it was taken back 
 by the author and rapidly condensed and formed anew into 
 what became the ' First Part of the Exercise-Book.' 
 
 It was with great regret that, through lack of leisure, the 
 author found himself compelled to provide, for practical pur- 
 poses, a work in a more condensed form and on a much 
 narrower plan than that of the one with which he wished to 
 have proceeded. But a new work of that kind necessarily re- 
 quires time and much thought, and the author had not much 
 time at his disposal — what he had was chiefly abstracted 
 from (too often) much-needed rest. It was indeed a great 
 pleasure to him, to do his utmost in labouring to supply a de- 
 mand which previous toil and care in years of Teaching 
 had been to some extent a means of causing. But nights were 
 
Vlll PREFACE. 
 
 not long enough, (for without rest sometimes further work 
 is impossible), and days were too much occupied, and 
 Printers also alas! were too much engaged, for the supply 
 of pages to be rapid enough for the then pressing demand. A 
 change of plan was therefore necessary. — 
 
 The most important portions of ' Parts II and III of the 
 Grammar' were embodied in the Exercise-Book ; And, for 
 some less immediately important matters, References were 
 made to the unpublished MS. of the Grammar. [Most of 
 those References are omitted in the Second Edition of the 
 Exercise-book — because that MS. is yet unpublished.] 
 
 The subject is of large extent. Not only has the Exercise- 
 book grown into a Volume, but moreover the condensed form 
 in which one or two great matters had to be treated therein 
 may seem to have made necessary some additional help 
 for Learners. The author has therefore added here to 
 'Part I. (on the Reading)' an Easy Introduction to the 
 Grammar-portion of the Exercise-book, — in the form of 
 'Reading-Lessons ' and 'Notes.' The full open arrangement of 
 VERB-forms on pages 58 — 74 here (with Notes on some ' Varia- 
 tions,' on pages 74 — 107), and the Declensions of NouN-forms 
 on pages 109 — 118, will (it is hoped) enable the Student to 
 master without much difficulty some important points from 
 which he may securely advance at his leisure to the conquest 
 by and by of large and goodly fields in the wide domain of 
 ' Hebrew ' Literature. 
 
 St. John's College, Cambridge. 
 February 1, 1877. 
 
 Note. A Key to the ' Examples for Reading ' is perhaps scarcely necessary ; — but, 
 for the convenience of those who may require the help, a ' Key to the Examples,' 
 is published separately. It will probably to useful to Self- Instructors. 
 
 %* The author will be thankful to any one who will kindly favour him with notice 
 of the typographical (or other) errors which he may discover in the following pages. 
 
PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION, 
 
 " Know what you have to do, and do it," is good advice to 
 a writer no less than to the Painter. We wish to bear in 
 mind that 'What we have to do' in Part I. is — to 
 point out HOW TO read what we see* in that part of the 
 Old Testament Scriptures which is in the Language gene- 
 rally called ' Hebrew.' [The use of this current term is open 
 to discussion, but such a discussion would be out of place 
 just now hei'e.] The study of this Language is important, not 
 only as a means of education peculiarly valuable in itself, 
 but also in regard to study of the Bible as a whole : — 
 it aids in a manner of its own the student of the New Tes- 
 tament ; for underlying the form of the diction of this there 
 are sometimes modes of thought characteristic of the Old 
 Language ; and (if the expression may be used) the Spirit 
 of Old Testament Scripture breathes through the New. 
 
 Again, — were it not for the general absence of any know- 
 ledge of Hebrew, and the various opinions so unhesitatingly 
 adopted (and sometimes strongly expressed) by those who 
 know it not, — we might have supposed that a knowledge 
 of this Language would be recognized as of at least some 
 value in regard to the opinions which men hold about The 
 Bible. This Book — what is it ? — Whatever may be men's 
 opinions about it, all must allow surely that a widely ex- 
 tended influence has been exercised by and through it on 
 generations of mankind. Some seem to think that the world 
 has got beyond it. Such persons generally know only, or 
 refer only, either to some Translation, or to certain opinions 
 held by leaders of their school or party. And there is end- 
 
 * Cp. Note (*) on p. 51. 
 
X PREFACE. 
 
 less confusion, perplexity, disorder of thought, — may we not 
 say ' As might be expected' ? And, all the while, far above 
 the mists and the clouds of controversies respecting it, in 
 bright clear light it is calmly shining. ' Is this so V 
 
 — the question may be asked. And ' Does it when studied 
 in itself help to disentangle the intricacies of the problem of 
 our life ? — to unveil at all the mystery of our being V And 
 ' Does it more V — 
 
 To help a little (if he may) the efforts of some who 
 may wish to know for themselves the truth of this matter, 
 is the aim of the writer. Too high an aim for him, it may 
 be ; but still he cannot but so aim. This first part of the 
 elementary work on grammar which he has in hand is but 
 small ; and it falls far short of what it should be for such a 
 purpose. More and greater defects than those which the 
 author perceives in it may render it still more unworthy of 
 the service for which he meant it. 
 
 For the removal of several defects and faults, it is his 
 pleasing duty to acknowledge his obligations to the distin- 
 guished Hebrew Scholars, Dr Chance of Trinity College, Cam- 
 bridge (and of Burleigh House, Sydenham-hill, London), and 
 the Rev. Charles Taylor, M.A., Fellow of St. John's College, 
 Cambridge, who have favoured him with a careful examina- 
 tion of the Proof-sheets and with several important sugges- 
 tions and corrections, as also to his younger friend, Frederick 
 Watson, Esq. B.A., Naden's Divinity Student (late Scholar)* of 
 St. John's College, who has also given him the benefit of his 
 careful revision and caused several additional corrections. His 
 most hearty thanks are due to these his friends for their kind 
 and valuable assistance. 
 
 St. John's College, Cambridge, 
 February 1, 1871. 
 
 * Now the Rev. F. Watson, M.A., Fellow and Theological Lecturer of St. John's 
 College, Cambridge, to whom the author is glad to record his obligations for much 
 kind help given since the above was written. — (February, 1877). 
 
CONTENTS OF PART I. (on the reading). 
 
 PAGE 
 
 I. Mode of Writing ... ... ... ... 1,2 
 
 II. Letters (Alphabet, p. 3) and Vowel-Marks (Table, p. 4) 2—9 
 
 First Practice (the Letters, and Letters with Vowels) 5 
 
 Second Practice (Easy Words) ... ... ... 7 
 
 III. Shva Moving (and Quiescent). — Compound Suva ... 9 — 12 
 
 Third Practice ... ... ... ... 12 
 
 IV. Quiescent Letters (and Mappek, p. 14) ... ... 12 — 15 
 
 Fourth Practice ... ... ... ... 15 
 
 V. Accents (and Makkeph, p. 15), — (Pause, p. 17), — ... 15 — 19 
 
 VI. Dagesh-lene and Dagesh-forte (and Raphe', p. 21 note) 20 — 22 
 
 Rules ... ... ... ... ... 22 
 
 Fifth Practice ... ... ... ... 23 
 
 VII. Rules (Shva, Slight- vowel, &c.) ... ... ... 24—30 
 
 Sixth Practice ... ... ... ... 30 
 
 Recapitulation of Rules ... ... ... 31 
 
 [Note. Some peculiarities of H, 1, PI, ^> C (Furtivc-Pathakh, — 
 Dot of $ and ty need sometimes for Khoulem, — 
 
 ) sometimes consonantal in ), !))] ... ... 32 — 36 
 
 Seventh Practice ... ... ... ... 37 
 
 Note on Appendices (A — E) ... ... ... 38 
 
 Appendix A. On the signification of Vowel-names, especially 
 
 Kaumets ... ... ... ... 38—42 
 
 „ B. „ Accents ... ... ... 42 — 44 
 
 „ C. „ Dagesh ... ... ... ... 45,46 
 
 „ D. „ Compound Shva ... ... ... 47, 48 
 
 E. „ ^TDandnp ... 49-51 
 
 [* # * For Contents of ' Reading-Lessons ' and ' Notes,' see next page]. 
 
CONTENTS OF THE < READING-LESSONS ' AND < NOTES.' 
 
 Reading-Lessons : — page 
 
 Personal Pronouns ... ... ... ... ... 55 
 
 Pronoun-Affixes with a Masc. Noun ... ... ... 56 
 
 Pronoun- Affixes with a Fem. Noun ... ... ... 57 
 
 Verb-Forms : — 
 
 Kal Voice ... ... ... ... ... 58—61 
 
 Niph-al Voice ... ... ... ... ... 62,63 
 
 Pi-el Voice ... ... ... ... ... 64,65 
 
 Pii-al Voice ... ... ... ... ... 66,67 
 
 Hiph-il* Voice ... ... ... ... ... 68,69 
 
 Hoph-al Voice ... ... ... ... ... 70, 71 
 
 Hithpa-el Voice ... ... ... ... ... 72—74 
 
 Notes : — 
 
 ' Root '-letters and ' Roots ' ... ... ... 74, 75 
 
 ' Names ' of Voices ... ... ... ... 76 
 
 Some forms of Past- Tense, and Participle (1), Kal, ... 7G — 79 
 
 Some ' Variations ' in Kal forms ... ... ... 79 — 82 
 
 Some ' Variations ' in Niph-al forms ... ... 82 — 86 
 
 Some ' Variations ' in Pl-cl & Pii-al forms ... ... 86 — 90 
 
 Some 'Variations' in Hiph-il & Hoph-al forma ... 90, 91 
 
 Some ' Variations ' in Hithpa-el forms ... ... 91 — 93 
 
 ' Variations ' when the 1st Root-letter is X ... ... 94, 95 
 
 Some other Great Classes of ' Variations ' ... ... 96 — 102 
 
 General ' Chart ' or Table for such, opposite to page 99 
 
 Notes on the ' Chart' ... ... ... ... 99 
 
 Two Tables (from Exercise book) ... ... 100—102 
 
 Two ' Variations ' at once ... ... ... ... 98 
 
 Letters called (by some) ' Paragogic ' ... ... 103 
 
 PAUSE-forms of Verbs ... ... ... 103—107 
 
 Pronoun- Affixes with Verb-forms — mentioned ... 107 
 
 Notes on Noun-Forms and such with Pron- Affixes . . . 108 — 120 
 
 Small Table for some Plural forms ... ... ... 116 
 
 References (to the Exercise-book) for some other matters 119—121 
 
 Note on ' Vauv Conversive ' ... ... ... 122, 123 
 
 Note on the Names of the Hebrew Tenses ... 1 23, 124 
 
 * The i being (as in machine) = ee. 
 
HEBREW GRAMMAR. 
 
 PART I. 
 
 I. Mode v of Writing. 
 
 1. Hebrew is written from right to left. The 22 letters 
 are consonantal, more or less. 
 
 In pointed Hebrew the vowels are represented by marks 
 attached to those letters. These vowel-marks are placed one 
 above, one in, and the rest below the line of consonant-marks. 
 
 2. In each of these two sets of marks, there is a mark for 
 Nothing. 
 
 i. The first of the 22 letters, K (called A-leph), is the 
 Nothing-mark among consonants. Without it Hebrew could 
 have no word beginning with a vowel* (except the one vowel 
 whose place is in the line of consonants, see § 11, p. 5). Such 
 English words as am, in, ofj would, if written in Hebrew 
 fashion, stand thus : 
 
 fN nX mtf 
 
 o i a 
 
 ii. The mark for Nothing among Vowels is — , called 
 Shva. This is written below the letter to which it belongs, 
 and expresses that this letter has no vowel. 
 
 * There would be no hook, as it were, on which to hang the opening vowel of 
 the word. Some have considered N as a " Spiritus Lenis" others as an 
 " Unaspirated Aspirate." It is often used as a .Root-letter. See more hereafter. 
 
 1 
 
2 MODE OF WRITING. §§ 3 — 7. 
 
 3. In Hebrew every letter* must have either a vowel 
 or the Shva shewing that it has no vowel. Thus: 
 
 {from would stand thus mrf 
 x -1 ° *■ 
 
 form mrt 
 : : o 
 
 4. We may remark at once that it is usual to omit the 
 Shva belonging to the last letter of a word when that last letter 
 is immediately preceded by a vowel. The Shva belonging to 
 the last letter is however then understood. Thus, such a word 
 as from is written mrf; but, in Hebrew, Shva must be under- 
 
 o : 
 
 stood as belonging to the final consonant, though — be not 
 given. 
 
 5. In Hebrew a vowel can bo attached to the consonant-marks 
 alone, never to another vowel. Shva too can be attached to the 
 consonant-marks alone. 
 
 6. When a word ends in two -f* consonants with no vowel 
 
 to either of them, the Shva is written beneath each of them. 
 
 Thus, such a word as form is written mrf; neither of the 
 
 : : o 
 
 two Shvas being then omitted and understood. 
 
 N.B. No pure Hebrew word has two Shvas together thus 
 ending a syllable anywhere else than at the end of a word. 
 
 II. Letters and Vowel-marks. 
 
 7. Note. Of the 22 letters of the following Alphabet 
 five have a different form at the end of a word ; and six have 
 a dot (belonging to them in pointed Hebrew). 
 
 * With certain exceptions, to be mentioned as soon as possible, 
 t There is no pure Hebreiv word ending in more than two consonants without 
 a vowel. 
 
ALPHABET. 
 
 In the list of Names &, is to be pro- 
 nounced broadly like a in ball. 
 
 § represents the sound of e in fete, 
 a in fame. 
 
 I represents the sound of i inmachine. 
 
 (-) above a vowel makes it long. 
 
 * Many pronounce 1 as the English 
 w, and call it Waw. This is not re- 
 commended. 
 
 t kh stands for the guttural ch in 
 Loch, or the German Buch. 
 
 X The pronunciation of y is inward 
 guttural. It is not usual to pronounce 
 it among the best scholars. Some Jews 
 have the custom of giving for it a na- 
 sal ng. This, however is not the true 
 power of the letter and is by no means 
 to be recommended. 
 
 || Some represent p by q, but as 
 this letter might be mistaken by the 
 Header for qu it is advisable to employ 
 for this purpose an English letter of 
 which the value is better known than 
 that of q by itself. The value of q 
 without u is not so well known in 
 English that it may be used as a mark 
 of known value. 
 
 IT Moderns sometimes put W (sh) 
 after *{j> (s) instead of before it. This 
 is a needless variation from old estab- 
 lished usage, and cannot (except by ;i 
 mistake) be supported by the present 
 arrangement of the letters of the Arabic 
 Alphabet. 
 
 The following Differences may be 
 noticed between letters somewhat 
 resembling each other: 
 
 (1) Between 3 h and 3 k (or 3 V 
 and 3 kh). that the second one (of each 
 pair) is more rounded below ; and be- 
 tween each of them and Q p (or Q ph), 
 that this last letter has a stroke inside 
 it:— 
 
 (2) Between J g and 3 n. that the 
 former has a slight opening between 
 the base and the stem : — 
 
 (3) Between T d and ~\ r, that the 
 latter is round-shouldered; and be- 
 tween each of them and "] (kh final), 
 that this last falls below the line : — 
 
 (4) Between n h and n kh- that the former has an opening at the left upper 
 corner; and between each of them and J"|, that this last has a projecting foot to 
 the left :— 
 
 (5) Between ) v and T Z. that the latter has a crook in its back; and between 
 each of them and | n (final), that this last falls below the line: — 
 
 (6) Between t, and E m. that the former has an opening above and the 
 latter below : — 
 
 (7) Between Q rn (final) and D S. that the latter is more rounded : — 
 
 (8) Between y (A-yin) and V ts* that in the former two strokes go each of 
 them down to the base whereas in the latter there is a short stroke on the back 
 of the other which is longer and much bent ; and between each of them and y 
 (ts final), that this latter falls below 7 the line. 
 
 o . 
 
 V 2 
 
 S3 g 
 
 S 3 
 
 £ es 
 o a 
 
 : 2* 
 
 ■ go 
 
 CD'S 
 
 u 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 fin 
 
 Name. 
 
 1 
 
 X 
 
 
 None 
 
 'A-leph 
 
 2 
 
 8- 
 
 
 b 
 
 V 
 
 Beth 
 Veth 
 
 3 
 
 8-1 
 
 
 g 
 
 Gimel 
 
 4 
 
 fi-l 
 
 
 d 
 
 Daleth 
 
 5 
 
 P|(4) 
 
 
 li 
 
 He 
 
 6 
 
 V 5 ) 
 
 
 V* 
 
 Vav 
 
 7 
 
 J (5) 
 
 
 z 
 
 Za-yin 
 
 8 
 
 n< 4 » 
 
 
 khf 
 
 Kheth 
 
 9 
 
 JO (6) 
 
 
 t 
 
 rah 
 
 10 
 
 * 
 
 
 y 
 
 Yod 
 
 20 
 
 go, 
 
 1 (3) 
 1 
 
 k 
 kh 
 
 Kaph 
 Khaph 
 
 30 
 
 b 
 
 
 1 
 
 La-med 
 
 40 
 
 Jb<«> ' 
 
 Dw 
 
 m 
 
 Mem 
 
 50 
 
 J (2) : 
 
 |(5) 
 
 n 
 
 Nun 
 
 60 
 
 D<?> : 
 
 
 s 
 
 Si-mech 
 
 70 
 
 y<« i 
 
 
 -: 
 
 A-yin 
 
 80 
 
 
 P| 
 
 p 
 
 Pe 
 
 Phe 
 
 90 
 
 x<« 
 
 V(8) 
 
 ts 
 
 Tsa-di 
 
 100 
 
 p 
 
 k|| 
 
 Koph 
 
 200 
 
 ^(3) 
 
 
 r 
 
 Resh 
 
 300 
 
 
 
 s ' 
 
 Shin 
 Sin 
 
 400 
 
 in 
 
 
 t 
 til 
 
 Tav 
 
 Thiv 
 
VOWEL-MARKS. § 8. 
 
 o 
 
 rd 
 
 m 
 
 <D 
 
 > 
 
 to 
 
 d 
 
 o 
 
 1-3 
 
 03 
 
 r^ 
 
 o 
 
 > 
 
 0) 
 
 rd 
 
 H 
 
 
 0) 
 
 CO 
 
 o3 
 
 
 K"~i 
 
 r>» 
 
 +3 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 -r3 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 
 d 
 
 03 
 
 M 
 
 <x> 
 
 <5? 
 
 
 
 rf 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 s-> 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 -1-3 
 
 d 
 
 ?3 
 
 
 CO 
 
 03 
 
 bo 
 
 >? 
 
 
 
 
 
 r«o 
 
 s 
 
 
 .1 
 
 ^3 
 
 e3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 .9 
 
 CO 
 
 03 
 
 
 CI 
 
 • i— 1 
 
 -f- 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 Sh 
 
 r£! 
 
 n3 
 
 
 
 
 
 03 
 
 03 
 
 
 3 
 
 Ph 
 
 CD 
 CD 
 
 d 
 
 
 
 o3 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 CD 
 
 ft 
 
 
 
 rd 
 
 a 
 
 .2 
 
 1 
 1 
 
 rd 
 
 o3 
 
 
 -3 
 
 ft 
 
 f-H 
 
 CD 
 
 d 
 o 
 d 
 o 
 
 
 
 CD 
 
 y* 
 
 0) 
 
 CD 
 
 d 
 
 
 CD 
 
 ^ 
 
 o 
 
 ft 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 CO 
 
 g 
 
 a 
 
 — 
 
 
 r* 
 
 
 ►*^! 
 
 r* 
 
 , 
 
 H^> 
 
 o 
 
 H 
 
 o 
 
 CO 
 
 a» 
 
 <4i 
 ■H 
 
 o 
 
 CD 
 
 -r-> 
 
 CD 
 
 rd 
 +3 
 
 (3 
 
 e in vie 
 
 in tin. 
 
 o 
 
 .3 
 
 .2 
 
 
 rO 
 
 .3 
 
 
 rd 
 
 H-3 
 
 ri 
 
 o 
 
 5 
 
 
 d 
 
 CO 
 
 cs 
 
 'l> 
 
 ^ 
 
 CO 
 
 <3 ^A 
 
 CO "^ 
 
 o3 co 
 
 CO 
 
 o3 
 
 CO 
 
 o3 
 
 
 CO 
 
 o3 
 
 c3 
 © 
 
 .9 
 
 bo 
 d 
 o 
 
 bo 
 
 
 ~ 03 
 
 •+3 
 
 O Jh 
 
 rH 
 O 
 
 H^T 
 
 O 
 
 
 • 
 
 
 "Sa c3 
 
 1 — ' 
 
 H 
 
 rd d 
 
 rd O 
 
 rd 
 
 i— -i 
 
 
 CD 
 
 * 
 
 cd 
 
 t® -H 
 
 •£ .2 
 
 O 
 
 CD 
 
 •+-5 
 
 • d 
 
 <D o 
 
 CO •-* 
 
 05 6 
 
 . CO 
 
 CD o3 
 
 CO ^i 
 
 • .2 
 
 CO 
 
 o 
 
 CD 
 
 
 
 CD 
 
 
 a vo? 
 
 o 
 
 a> 
 
 S 
 
 »\ 
 
 »\ 
 
 
 ■\ 
 
 «\ 
 
 
 «8 <3 
 
 eg 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 «0 
 
 103 
 
 3<D 5H 
 
 >o 
 
 >2 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 C-] 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ft 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 -d 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 -4-=> 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 r* 
 
 
 
 
 r^ 
 
 d 
 
 o3 
 
 
 a 
 
 (Kaumets 
 [ or Kamet 
 
 )05 
 
 r-i 
 i 
 
 io3 
 
 CO 
 
 H 
 
 103 
 
 IS 
 
 bo 
 d 
 o 
 
 (Khou-lem 
 
 } 0T Kho-lem 
 
 M 
 
 1 
 
 id 
 
 rd 
 
 m 
 
 o3 
 
 H-3 
 1 
 
 »o3 
 
 ft 
 
 Se- gol 
 Short-Khe-i 
 
 l-d 
 
 W 
 1 
 CO 
 
 <v 
 d 
 
 03 
 
 CO 
 -1-3 
 
 v d 
 
 r^ 
 
 3 
 
 , 
 
 l> 
 
 1= 
 
 I' 
 
 •1 
 
 rH 
 
 o 
 
 
 1' 
 
 l=- !• 
 
 1- 
 
 l- 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 , s — 
 
 j-. 
 
 
 
 
 
 &H 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 r-i 
 
 i, 
 
 en" 
 
 CO 
 
 "*■ 
 
 
 r-5 
 
 ©4 co" 
 
 -* 
 
 
 
 
 T 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 r— l 
 
 
 
 
 "© 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 a> 
 
 
 
 
 ts 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 £ 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 rH 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 &J0 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 d 
 
 
 
 
 rd 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 r-3 
 
 
 
 
 W 
 
 r-H 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 h- i 
 
 
 
 
 r— 1 
 
 
 
NOTES. 4, 
 
 (1) 
 
 [These eight pages, viz. 4 a) — 4 (s) , are not reckoned as part of the hook. They 
 contain merely what may he called " a little parenthetic talk" ahout some matters 
 connected with the subject. The subject itself is continued on page 5, and these 
 intervening pages need not be read by any who are at all pressed for time. 
 
 Note (I) may be thought to treat of matters of but small importance. 
 Note (II) is but an expansion of the Footnote on p. i. 
 
 Xote (III) contains merely a few practical observations which perhaps every 
 one would have been able to make for himself.] 
 
 Note (I). Marks for letters (in Transcription). 
 
 It may seem needless to remark that : — 
 Distinction should be made between* 
 
 ' Marks for the Pronunciation, or Power, of letters,' and 
 ' Marks for such letters themselves (in Transcription) ; ' 
 or, in other words, that, — as a 'Phonetic Equivalent of a word,' i.e. 
 a ' representative of its Pronunciation,' is not always the same as a 
 'Transcript of its letters,' so too a 'Phonetic equivalent of a letter,' 
 i.e. a 'Mark representing its Power,' is not always the same thing 
 exactly as a ' Mark for the letter itself (in Transcription).' 
 
 For example, the Pronunciation of the French word ' honneur ' 
 may be represented by 'on-Ur 1 ; and any mark for 'Xothing,' to 
 represent the Pronunciation or Power of the 'A,' would be clumsily 
 out of place there as well as quite unnecessary. 
 
 But quite a different thing would be a Transcript of the word in 
 letters (or other signs) of some other language. For this purpose 
 it might be requisite to have some mark for representing that ' h, ' 
 in order that the Full Spelling of the'word might be represented in 
 the other characters. 
 
 Again the Pronunciation or Power of the ' e 1 in 'cell' and that of 
 the 's' in 'sell' are the same ; and so that of the l g' in 'gem' and 
 the '</"' in 'Jenkins;'' and so that of the 'c' in ' caf and the ' V in 
 ' kangaroo? etc. ; and people find no difficulty in this, nor in having 
 
 * Some disregard the distinction and consequently fall into much confusion. 
 
4 (2) NOTES. 
 
 the same Power marked by the same Sign in an Alphabet. But if 
 it were necessary to transcribe such words in the letters (or other 
 signs) of some other language, it might indeed be necessary to have 
 distinguishing marks for such letters. Now since, unhappily, so few 
 comparatively are familiar with Hebrew, many wish to have Hebrew 
 words transcribed for them in other characters. And it seems to be 
 necessary at present to recognize and (to some extent) try to meet 
 that wish. [We trust that with the progress of education the wish 
 will die away. Greek Scholars do not want such transcripts of 
 Greek words.] 
 
 Bearing in mind then the distinction mentioned above, at the be- 
 ginning of this ' Note,' wherever in the following pages we think 
 good to give the Pronunciation of a word we endeavour to give for 
 this a simple Phonetic equivalent — expressed in characters which 
 are in common use and generally understood and as unmistakeable as 
 possible, and such alone without any additions. On the other hand, 
 in the ' Key to the Examples,' recognizing (as we do) a use to 
 which it may be put by some who do not know the Hebrew letters, 
 we endeavour to spell fully the Hebrew words in a ' Transcript.' 
 
 There are various methods of such Transcription. And it is ad- 
 visable that there should be as mnch agreement as possible. "We 
 adopt therefore as far as we may some signs which are already in 
 nse. Some however we must reject because they are either not 
 simple enough, or not distinct enough, or too distressing to the eye 
 of the Bender. 
 
 (1) We may allow the use of (') the ' Spiritus lenis'' (as it is called) 
 in Greek, which — having no Consonantal Value at all— may be 
 thought to be not inadmissible as a mark for &$. Some use the 
 bare ' for this. But the use of a mark for a new and quite 
 different purpose from any for which it is in common use may lead 
 to confusion. Dr. H. Ewald, in his ' Lehrh. der hehr. Spr.' uses 
 the ' for fc$ (sometimes) and also for a quite different purpose. 
 Thus, on p. 51 [edition, 1870], he uses ' for the tf of "fl^ light, — 
 although he had used it just before as a sort of Apostrophe in his 
 
NOTES. 4o 
 
 bWka for bi-Whhd (in which there is no X), as also in his ss'mitM 
 for ts'nu-thuth on p. 53, and in his ka-tfbu for Jcd-Wvu on p. 54, etc. 
 This latter frequent use of the ' is a fair and proper use of it which 
 he, and all others, have full right to. We gladly cite Dr. E.'s 
 practice as above, and we too must so use ' when we think fit. But 
 might not a quite different use of it (for X) cause confusion ? Dr. 
 E. in his ektfba for ekh-fvd (rftH^X) on P- 55 omits the ' for X at 
 the beginning of the word, or he would have the mark ' for two 
 different purposes in one word ! * — Others would use the ' for X, only, 
 refusing the other which is a fair and proper use of it and one that 
 is needed sometimes. But, as they in avoiding that confusion fall 
 into serious error, we had rather not follow them. It seems best to 
 retain all common uses of the ' and to give it some distinguishing 
 mark when we use it for {<• Anything, the pair of brackets even 
 (as above), will do. "We will therefore use (') for X; but [X.B.] 
 only in the ' Key,' — never in these pages. 
 
 (2) The ', the ' Spiritus asper' (as it is called) in Greek, is in 
 use as a mark for ^. It is not strong enough for representing fairly 
 the strong 'inward Guttural' value of ^. But since that is already 
 so in use we may adopt ( f ), from lack of a better, as a mark for 
 y. The great difference between its value and that of the strong 
 V should he carefully borne in mind ; also that the best Scholars 
 usually do not pronounce y at all. [The fact however of this letter 
 being always a Full Consonant (although not pronounced in practice) 
 is never lost sight of among Scholars.] 
 
 N.B. We should prefer the somewhat older forms of ' and ', viz. 
 -i older form of the 'spiritus lenis, 1 and Jr older form of the 'spiritus 
 asper,' for X and ^. — But we see an objection. 
 
 (3) Further it is necessary for Transcription-purposes to have some 
 
 * As we find in his ftJm'ordhm on p. 155 (i!>.), where the second ' is for N and 
 the first ' for the other rmrosE (as above), but there is no notice of this 
 being so. His corresponding transcript of HXD on p. 486 would be *"a (the 
 second ' f or K , and the first ' for the other purpose) ; which however he does not 
 give. — Thus the use of ' alone for X seems open to some objection. 
 
4 (4) NOTES. 
 
 means of distinguishing between letters similarly sounded. The 
 simplest means seems to be the use of some additional mark for one 
 of two such letters. And the simplest additional mark is a simple 
 dot placed beneath one of them, — as in 
 
 s for D, to distinguish it from £J> (s), 
 
 t for tO, to distinguish it from ft (t). 
 
 (4) So we may give 
 
 k for p, to distinguish it from 5 00, 
 v for 1 , to distinguish it from ^ (v). 
 
 [Obs. i. Such arbitrary signs, conveying of themselves no definite 
 information, not being signs of known value in common use, cannot 
 well be given as Marks for the ' Pronunciation ' or ' Power ' of 
 Letters — in an Alphabet. Por some languages such are useful when 
 fully defined. We abstain from the use of such on p. 3. 
 
 Obs. ii. We also abstain here as far as we can from the interminable 
 disputes about pronunciation. And perhaps it is best to leave them 
 to those whose nature it is to deligbt therein. The few remarks in 
 Note II. below are perhaps almost necessary. And the following 
 brief ' Obs. iii.' may be added here. 
 
 Obs. iii. There is a certain amount of correspondence between the 
 
 Names and Powers (and also the Numerical value) of several of the 
 
 Hebrew and Greek Letters.* 
 
 *#* The figures within ( ) here are the Numerical values of the Letters of which 
 the Names stand on the right of the ( ). 
 
 (1) A'leph & Alpha, (2) Beth & Beta, (3) Gimel & Gamma, (4) Bd- 
 
 leth & Delta, (5) BZe & E-psilon (formerly a mark for Aspiration), 
 
 (6) Vdv & Bau (the Bigamma, lost as a letter of the Alphabet but 
 
 retained as a Numeral 6), (7) Zdyin & Zeta,\ (8) Kheth & Ma (h, 
 
 * It is very interesting also to trace some correspondencies in Ancient Forms 
 likewise. But this is certainly not a matter for a practical ' Easy' & ' Introductory' 
 Hebrew Grammar. 
 
 t Zeta is said to have been the representative of Tsa-di formerly, and to have 
 "taken the place" of [the now lost Greek letter] San — "standing originally 7 th 
 for Zayin." 
 
NOTES. 4 (5) 
 
 which was formerly an Aspirated Guttural), (9) Teth & Theta, 
 (10) Yod & Iota (Yota), (20) Kapli & Kappa, (30) Lamed & Lambda 
 (? rather Lamda), (40) Mem & Ma, (50) iVrirc & JS T u, (60) Sdmekh & 
 JT*» or X*', (80) Pe & Pi. 
 
 The many changes, as well as the lapse of time, since "the Phoeni- 
 cians introduced not only Letters hut also many other matters-of- 
 instruction among the Hellenes," may cause surprise at the remains 
 of so much agreement as above rather than at such variations as the 
 following : 
 
 (70) Ayin & O-mikron, (90) Tsddi lost in Greek (in which however 
 there is the old Sampi* with the value 900 — the value of Tsadi final); 
 — and so, the numerical values being thus shifted, the Hebrew sign for 
 100 is Koph whereas to the; corresponding old Greek letter (JToppa) the 
 value 90 is attributed ; and so we have, also, (200) Resh & (100) Rho, 
 (300) Shin or Sin & (200) Sigma, (400) Tdv in Hebrew & (300) Tau 
 in Greek. 
 
 But this may be thought to be a matter for Greek rather than for 
 Hebrew Students.] 
 
 Note (II). Pkonunciation of two of the Vowels. 
 
 There is considerable difference of opinion with respect to the pro- 
 nunciation of the First Long-vowel — There is a less important 
 difference of opinion with respect to the pronunciation of the Fourth 
 Long-vowel ) (or, as it may also be written, — ). 
 
 (a) Some pronounce the First Long- vowel as an o. This may fairly 
 be called an 'incorrect' pronunciation [Comp. a remark cited in 
 Note (*) on p. 39]. 
 
 (/3) Another mode of pronunciation is fashionable, but open to 
 
 * It does not matter to us here whether, or not, the "later" Hebrews followed 
 " (lie example of the Greeks" in using the " letters as Numerals;" — as also whether 
 the Numerical value of ' Sampi' is due to its being placed after ' Omega,' or its being 
 placed after ' O-mega' (800) due to its Numerical value (900). 
 
4 (6) NOTES. 
 
 some objections. Many, — instead of pronouncing — and *| gutturally 
 and fully as on p. 4, — give for — much such a value as that of a in 
 
 T 
 
 father, and for ) the sharp o value of o in tone. With this pro- 
 nunciation the present writer was familiarised from his early child- 
 hood. It was the more common one, and is still preferred by not 
 a few. But he deliberately gave it up more than a quarter of a cen- 
 tury ago, and he had some difficulty in breaking free from the habit. 
 He took the trouble to break free from that habit because he found 
 that the pronunciation as on p. 4 is much more suited to the Lan- 
 guage. Also, not only is this pronunciation (as on p. 4) the same as 
 that of very great Hebraists, but moreover one may perhaps think 
 that as the Language is a Guttural Language it is somewhat strange 
 to banish from it the Guttural vowel-sound. This is so banished if 
 it be not allowed to the — , for there is no other means of represent- 
 ing it in Hebrew. — And (may one add ?) it is sadly amusing to see 
 the mistakes often made by writers who have adopted the more 
 fashionable pronunciation. One finds — put for — , and — for — , in 
 beautiful confusion. In theory they allow a longer-drawn utterance 
 for — than — , but in practice people make no appreciable difference 
 between them. And consequently they confuse them. In his now 
 long experience as a practical teacher and lecturer the present writer 
 has in several instances found that men who so pronounce have for 
 a long time been unable to write the simplest piece of Hebrew Com- 
 position without making most serious mistakes in spelling — owing to 
 their confusion of _ and — by reason of their pronouncing the two 
 so much alike. 
 
 The difference of pronunciation in the case of the *! is of far less 
 importance than the other. If any prefer the sharper to the more 
 full sound of the Fourth Long- vowel, one would not much mind. "We 
 prefer the more full pronunciation of it which we have endeavoured 
 to represent in the Table on p. 4. It is somewhat difficult to repre- 
 sent a sound accurately on paper. What one wishes to represent in 
 this case is a ' throat-utterance ' rolled through the whole mouth, and 
 issuing through an aperture formed by the lips — the lower lip being 
 
NOTES. 4 (7) 
 
 held slightly inwards. — This careful description may seem unnecessary 
 to some. It may be found useful hereafter. 
 
 Note (III). The Sounds for some Towel-marks in English. 
 
 Learners sometimes feel considerable difficulty from what strikes 
 them as "The difference of the Yowel-sounds in Hebrew from those 
 of the English a, e, i, o, u, — as usually pronounced." Since however 
 ry Hebrew the sounds are always the saile fob the same Yowel- 
 mabk, whereas in English one-and-the-same mark may stand for a 
 variety of sounds, there is cause for rejoicing rather than of feeling 
 difficulty at this diffeeexce so far. For instance the a in father is 
 generally called by a name {Ay), corresponding with the e in fete or 
 a in fate, although it is generally pronounced differently : for the 
 a in fate is uttered through a channel limited by the teeth ; but that 
 in father, rather, is uttered by keeping the teeth out of the way and 
 employing the extreme upper part of the throat and back part of the 
 soft palate. This value, and that of a in call (which is produced by 
 the throat a little lower down), must be allowed to belong to a 
 different class from that of the a in fate : and the Student may surely 
 be congratulated that in Hebrew they are not all three of them repre- 
 sented by one and the same mark. Again, the value of i (in such 
 English words as file, time, and the Personal Pronoun /) is not that 
 of a vowel simply ; although we reckon it among our English vowels. 
 The i as usually pronounced in English is somewhat more than a 
 simple vowel. There is a distinction between vowels and consonants, 
 viz. this : — that a vowel-utterance is a simple vocal utterance through 
 the organs of speech, a \o\vc\-mark being the representative of such 
 an utterance ; whereas a consonant-letter is a mark of movement of 
 an organ or organs in the process of vocal utterance, ' sotindiyig along 
 tvith" 1 (as the word ' consonant' itself implies) or, more strictly, modify- 
 ing the issuing stream of vocal-utterance. Thus the vowel-mark repre- 
 senting the particular vocal-utterance, the consonant-letter represents 
 
4 <8) NOTES. 
 
 any movement* of organs combined with that vocal utterance. Now 
 if any one will observe closely what he docs (naturally) in saying 
 "I" he will perceive that a movement, either of the teeth or of the 
 tongue in the palate, is concerned in the utterance. Tbis movement 
 is recognized as consonantal in the word aye (that "bare vowel 'I'" 
 in Shakespeare's phrase, — Rom. and Jul. iii. 2, — 
 
 " I am not I, if there be such an I"). 
 The word eye, like which most pronounce I now, requires the like 
 movement. It is remarkable, therefore, that in our list of vowels 
 a, e, i, o, u, the true value of the 2nd is one of the values assigned 
 to the 1st, the true value of the 3rd is given to the 2nd ; and to the 
 3rd is attributed a value which seems to have in it what is consonantal 
 as well as vowel utterance. 
 
 * The more advanced student will recognize the agreement of this with the use 
 of the technical term HJWn {movement) for the pronunciation of a consonant, even 
 though the consonant be also what is technically termed a " perceived Resting -letter 
 (nN13 rU)." Thus R. D. Kimkhi writes of the last-word-but-two in Ps. v. 9, that 
 it "comes with fiJJ3n {movement of i.e. pronunciation of), the first root-letter * ;" 
 where the letter referred to has — quiescent (§ 21). Compare also the following 
 remarks of M. Silvestre de Sacy at the beginning of his Grammaire Arabe : 
 
 " Les elements de la parole sont de deux sortes : les sons, nommes aussi voix par 
 quelques grammairiens, et les articulations. Les sons consistent en une simple 
 emission de Fair modifiee diversement. Ces diverses modifications dependent prin- 
 cipal ement de la forme du passage que le canal vocal et la bouche pretent a remis- 
 sion de l'air,mais elles n'exigent aucun jeu des organes exterieurs. Les articulations 
 sont formees par la disposition et le mouvement subit et instantane des differentes 
 parties mobiles de l'organe de la parole. . . . Ces parties, diversement disposees, 
 opposent un obstacle a la sortie de l'air; et lorsque Pair vient a vaincre cet obstacle, 
 il donne lieu a une explosion plus ou moin forte et diversement modifiee, &c." 
 
 Somewhat similarly Dr. H. Ewald writes (Lehrb. der hebr. Spr. p. 76 of the 
 edition of 1870) : " Vocal ist der ansich klare laut, entweder rein auslautend (a) oder 
 von den obern und untern organen etwas beengt ((', u), immer aber noch aus offnem 
 
 munde ungehemmt hervorschalleud Ein mitlaut fursich ist noch kein 
 
 voller fester laut." The following is wordy : " "Wahrend nun der vocal der reiue 
 athem ist, laut werdend auf verschiedene art, kann er zugleich von den ansich stum- 
 meren lauten (mitlauten) der sprachwerkzeuge, kehle, gaumen, zuuge und mund, 
 begleitet, gehalten, beschrankt, angefangen und beschlossen werden ; und indem 
 diese laute noch viel manchfacher sind als die vocale, audi auf die verschiedenste art 
 mit diesen verbunden werden konnen, entsteht die grosse menge mijglicher sylben." 
 
 One is tempted to think that De Sacy's lucid style and master-like exposition 
 betoken a more intimate and exact knowledge of w T hat he is writing about. 
 
LETTERS AND VOWELS. §§ 9-11. 
 
 9. The letters have been classed as follows : 
 
 ymN* Guttural 
 M»J Palatal 
 
 rran Lingual 
 WD13 Labial 
 p^DT Dental Q^DT are by some called Sibilant). 
 
 10. They may be read, for Practice, in the following lines: 
 
 : ana am mmtf •p *p7 nz poy epa ptp-wnn 
 : nnnn W yyt ddd& jn ^m aaa 3332 
 
 Tbe Consonants with Vowels may be spelled in 
 
 ^a n ^ 3 3 x tjj s n n ft* ix \s* k k 
 
 I I v to ^ n ij t tn j n sin hnn 
 
 ■♦a a *& te <y £ d d tj .} o o & iS *3 3 ; 
 
 nn in vi jpi' jj b te> tf & *\ n ip *p ? ? 
 
 11. A syllable may consist of 
 
 (1) A Consonant with a Vowel, — as X 3 etc. above ; 
 
 (2) A Consonant with a Vowel followed by a Consonant, 
 
 or by two Consonants, — as in the following words 
 
 (to be read from Right to Left, and to be spklled) : 
 
 \m EJ$ if el 7}^ to muth f\fo one d ea d (•*) , ken |^J a son 
 
 auv 3i$ a father douv 'y^ a bear piikli t"!l2 a flask yaud^ a hand 
 
 heen V>f\ a hin sak p£*J sack-cloth ^vauv I") a hook t Ehag }p| a festival 
 
 t gasli g«|!| a cZotf ^netsVJaAawi- ,Zeephgp£»jpA /Tatar *T2f or *fj^ 7>-e 
 
 mikk-maur ^33£ a we^ / toupb ttfl a timbrel f kous ^3 a CM J° 
 
 yiishk pjj/* /<e will-give-drink goph-reethfVl^|t brimstone fit J^^ a jdc?4 
 
 Obs. } may, at the beginning of a word, stand as a syllable by 
 itself as in s l2^ ii-med, «|^ u-voii. It is the only vowel which can 
 stand as a syllable by itself. It may also be attached to fc$ 
 as in "fix ur, t^-flX u-reem ; or to any Consonant as in V? lu, 
 yfo tuv. It then always stands after the letter to which it is 
 attached. 
 
 * From the peculiarity of N, it must either he allowed to have a Class to itself 
 or he put with others in a Class the full conditions of which it cannot satisfy. The 
 latter has been preferred by those who have classed it as above. 
 
 t The — is u (K. Khautuph), i.e. No. 4 of (II) on p. 4. 
 
 % 1J is Final Khaph (p. 3, No. 20) with Sltva. See more on p. 7, Note (J). 
 
6 VOWEL-MARES. §§ 12-16. 
 
 12. The 3 d Long- vowel *— (§ 8, 1. 3) has, with the --, a * he- 
 longing to it.* The two together stand for this Vowel. But 
 
 [Sometimes, in the Bible, the * is not ■written, and the — alone stands for the 
 3 d Long- vowel (looking like the 3 d Short-vowel, § 8, II. 3). This is called 
 'Deficient' or 'Defective' Long-Kherik.t It has the full value of *— . 
 
 N.B. Sometimes, in the Bible, the 3 d Short-\ov?e\ (— ) has * standing_after it (and 
 so looks like the 3 d Zowy-vowel) ; i.e. '— stands sometimes for Short-Kherik.] 
 
 13. The 4 th Long- vowel has two forms, ) and — (§ 8, I. 4). 
 The form i* is called 'Full IDwulem,' and the form — is called 
 'Deficient Khoulem.' f Their vowel-value is the same. 
 
 N.B. The ' Deficient ' form (— ) is never used at the end of a word. 
 
 14. The 5 th Long- vowel 'Shurik' (}*), the only Vowel which 
 stands in the line of the Hebrew Consonants, cannot be repre- 
 sented by the dot alone without the ). But 
 
 ['Deficient' or 'Defective' Shurik f is sometimes represented by— (Kibbuts), 
 which then has the full vowel-value of Shurik. 
 
 N.B. Also, the u of Kibbuts is sometimes represented by -1* in the Bible.] 
 
 15. In appearance the 4 th Short- vowel —6 does not differ from 
 the 1 st Long- vowel. But these are quite different vowels. The 
 Student will be able to distinguish between them soon. At 
 present we will always help him by specially marking any 
 — which stands for 6. % 
 
 16. In any Hebrew word (a) the number of syllables is the 
 same as the number of Vowels ; for (/3) there is no syllable with- 
 out a Vowel in it, and (7) no Consonant ever has more than one 
 Vowel at a time, and (8) no Vowel ever has another Vowel in 
 the same syllable with itself, and (e) two Vowel-marks are never 
 combined to represent a single vocal-utterance. § [(£) Of course 
 no Consonant can ever have at once both a Vowel and a Shva to 
 show that it has no Vowel.~\ 
 
 * For this, the 'full form, some use the expression ' scripho pletia.' 
 t For 'deficient form' some use the expression 'senptio defectiva.' 
 \ From an old use of the mark — for this 4th vowel v, its name may not im- 
 probably have arisen. For, C|t3n w T as (in Masora, i.e. Tradition) used as a name 
 for — (Shva) ; and K/iautuph (P|-1Dn), being strictly the Passive Participle of PpH 
 may therefore express " written with Shva (lit. Shva'd)." Hence, -5- being Kaumels, 
 yr is Kaumcts Khauluph (lit. Kaumets Shva'd). 
 
 \ Therefore there is properly no such thing as a diphthong in Hebrew. 
 
VOWEL-MARKS. § 17, 18. 7 
 
 17. All the vowels and consonants occur in the following few words, 
 and some of them more than once. 
 
 Obs. Kaumets-Khautuph is marked with an asterisk here. 
 Syllables are divided by a vertical line, where it is necessary. 
 
 1. Til a fleece 
 
 2. 7J3 dew (pause fform) 
 
 3. Yp an end 
 
 4. TE? plaister 
 
 5. pi corn 
 
 6. H)2 a star 
 
 7. [3 lest 
 
 8. 1¥ a precept 
 
 9. D*fcO comers (m.) 
 
 10. nty awake thou (f.) 
 
 11. riHIJil he was made to 
 
 - 1: t * 
 
 go down 
 
 12. &3h|D* he will keep- 
 
 threshold 
 
 13. tl/l^to flung (sing, mas.) 
 
 18. Excepting the cases mentioned in §§ 12, 14, 15, each 
 Hebrew vowel-mark represents always one and the same vowel- 
 sound. Where a change of vowel-soimd is wanted, a different 
 vowel-mark is put. 
 
 It may bo well to caution the Reader to be on his guard against 
 adopting usages of his own language as affording him trustworthy 
 guidance for liis practice in Hebrew. Does any desire the familiar 
 a, e, i, o, u, (as we call them) 1 Let him bear in mind that in English 
 we do not limit each vowel-mark to one vowel-sound, and the repre- 
 sentation of our pronunciation on paper is consequently very imperfect. 
 
 * 6, Kaumeta- Khautuph. See " Obs." above. 
 
 f The meaning of this expression will be seen by and by; it will be given as 
 soon as possible. 
 
 J This word, No. 13, is given here as a means of introducing to the Reader's 
 notice a case of exception to § 4, viz. this: When the last letter of a word is "i, 
 as here, the Shva belonging to the last letter of a word is written inside the 
 "\ instead of being understood as usual. 
 
 [Further, it may be here remarked that 
 
 i. When this final letter has its dot, besides, the Shva is put below the dot 
 (thus *|) : 
 
 Similarly, ii. When the "J has ~^r, this vowel is written inside the letter 
 (thus f\), 
 
 And iii. When the "] has its dot, as well as a T", the T is put below the dot 
 (thus })]. 
 
8 
 
 VOWELS. § 19. 
 
 [19. Of the ten vowels given in § 8, it is seen that there 
 is a certain correspondence between the 1st, 2nd, &c. of the one 
 set and the 1st, 2nd, &c. of the other. The inter-relation may- 
 be more fully pointed out by means of the anticipatory statement 
 that, in the process of Hebrew word-forming, certain broad facts 
 of usage stand out in regard to the shortening of Long into 
 Short vowels, and the lengthening of Short into Long ones. 
 
 The following great Leading Rules may be given : 
 
 Long Vowels. Short Vowels. Long Vowels. 
 
 is shortened into — 
 
 is lengthened into — 
 
 ::: I) 
 
 The Three grand classes to which the ten vowels are thus 
 reduced are more clearly seen in the following Table, in which 
 the arrow-heads point out the interchange just now mentioned. 
 
 (1) 
 
 II. 
 
 f(2) 
 
 (3) 
 
 The expressions Long and Shortf vowels are used here 
 
 * o, Kaumeta-Khautuph. 
 
 f In place of these terms, ' Long ' and ' Short,' Hebrew writers used 'Great' 
 and 'Little.' This difference in the expressions may correspond with a differ- 
 ence of conception, and should be borne in mind by any one who deals with 
 their expressions. To deal with their differing expressions as if they were the 
 same as our own, may very probably cause one not only to fail of apprehending 
 their meaning but even to form wrong notions respecting it. 
 
VOWELS. § 20. SHVAS. § 21, 22. 9 
 
 with reference respectively to the length and shortness of the 
 time of breathing through the particular channel which defines 
 the stream of utterance in each case. 
 
 20. The defining channels for the above-marked vowels are 3 in number, 
 corresponding with the 3 Classes I, II, III. In I, (the tongue being kept 
 down) the channel of utterance is that of throat and whole open mouth 
 for ^f, and that of the open mouth (particularly the back part of the soft palate 
 and the extreme upper throat) for — ; In II, the utterance is palatal and 
 through the slightly-opened teeth ; the middle of the tongue rises towards 
 the roof of the mouth for — - and ir, and much more for i-r and — . In 
 III, the utterance is through the slightly-opened lips, — the lower lip being 
 held within the upper one for *| and ~v (6), and made to project a little 
 beyond it for !) and — for which last two the middle of the tongue is also 
 up towards the roof of the mouth.] 
 
 III. Shva Moving [& Quiescent], — Compound Shva. 
 
 21. In Hebrew there are not only such syllables as ro, ram, 
 rend, see § 11, — but also such as fro, tram, trend, i.e. having 
 two consonants before a Vowel. The first of two such Con- 
 sonants in Hebrew has a Shva (§ 3), as in (i) *73 (klee), 
 (ii) 733 (k'ner), (iii) T133 (k'nerd). And 
 
 Def. (1). A Shva under a letter which begins a syllable is 
 called Shva ' Moving.' 
 
 Def. (2). A Shva (whether expressed or understood) at the 
 end of any syllable is called Shva ' Quiescent,' as that under 
 the 7 in (ii), and under the 7 & 7 both in (iii) above and also 
 in (iv) 737D (sir-paud). 
 
 Def. (3). A syllable which does not end in Shva is called 
 'Open' (and also 'Simple'), — as 3 N3, *2, ttS; and 
 
 Def. (4). A syllable which ends in Shva is called 'Closed* 
 (and also ' Compound'), as those in (ii), (iii) & (iv) above. 
 
 22. The Shva Moving requires special attention. Occurring, 
 as it does, beneath a consonant which has no vowel and there- 
 fore is carried on to the next consonant, Shva Moving may be 
 said to mark the hiatus between the 1st and 2nd of two com- 
 
 * The terms Quiescent and Moving are simply English equivalents of Hebrew 
 terms current among Hebrew writers. 
 
10 SHVA SIMPLE AND COMPOUND. § 22. 
 
 bined consonants*. The hiatus is more or less perceived ac- 
 cording as the combination of consonants is more or iess difficult. 
 There are combinations of consonants in Hebrew which we are 
 not familiar with. These may at first present to the beginner 
 some little mechanical difficulty t which he will soon get over by 
 practice. There are, however, certain consonants in the utter- 
 ance of which there is such difficulty that no one could avoid 
 making the hiatus perceptible in endeavouring to combine one 
 of these (having no vowel) with the consonant following. 
 
 More fully : — In any case of such a combination of two consonants as, 
 for instance, the f and r in the English word fro, the organs are first 
 prepared for producing the first consonant f and then shifted rapidly for 
 producing the second consonant r so that the two combined are brought 
 out together upon the vowel-utterance, the mark for which (viz. o here) is 
 attached to the second consonant. 
 
 When, instead of the f in fro, a Hebrew consonant involving difficulty 
 of utterance has to be combined with a consonant after it, and an effort 
 therefore is commenced and at once broken off— and the organs prepared 
 for producing the consonant which follows, — a perceptible hiatus is 
 unavoidable. 
 
 This perceptible hiatus involves an approximation to vocal 
 utterance or vowel-sound ; and, in order to give a hint of the 
 vowel-sound chosen in each case, a short-vowel j mark is put by 
 the side of the Shva which marks the hiatus. Of the short 
 vowels only three are used for this purpose, viz. — , — , — 1|, — for, 
 
 approximation to i (as well as to e) is, for practical pur- 
 poses, sufficiently marked by -vy, and 
 
 approximation to u (as well as to o) is, for practical pur- 
 poses, sufficiently marked by -^r- 
 
 [This agrees with what was said above that there are Three Classes in 
 
 * In Hebrew there are never more than ttvo Consonants so combined ; — i, e., 
 in other words, there are never two moving Shvas consecutively. 
 
 t It is this, most probably, which has given rise to the great mistake of 
 some that Shva stands for a half vowel! The vowel of the second Consonant 
 (or the corresponding Short-voiael) may sometimes be very slightly heard during 
 the combining process, but the — must not be mistaken as a mark for that. 
 
 + Of course the Long Vowels are excluded by the nature of the case ; for, 
 it is approximation only to vowel-sound that is spoken of. Approximation to a 
 Long Vowel would involve somewhat more than a short vowel. 
 
 H o, Kaumets-Khautuph. 
 
COMPOUND SHVAS. §§ 23 — 26. 11 
 
 which all the Ten Vowels may be grouped. It may be added that the 
 three vowels just now mentioned, viz. 
 
 may be taken as representative vowels of the Three Classes ; and that the 
 vowel-points in Arabic are but three, corresponding therewith.] 
 
 23. -=r {i.e. Shva with Pathakh) is called Khateph-Pathakh, 
 -vf (i.e. Shva with Segol) is called Khateph- Segol, and 
 -^r (i.e. Shva with Kaumets-Khautuph), Khateph-Kaumets^ , 
 and each of these compound forms is called a Compound Shva. 
 
 2-1. The Consonants to which the Compound Shvas belong 
 are the four ^ PI H X. Beneath any of these a Moving Shva 
 always takes one of the three compound forms in § 23. 
 
 Obs. Shva occurs sometimes in compound form under letters other 
 than ynnX> m some instances for Declension and Conjugation reasons 
 (as will be seen hereafter), and sometimes in cases of perceived hiatus in com- 
 bining two consonants with the vowel of the second one. 
 
 25. Simple — under any of ynnX is, by § 21, Quiescent. 
 
 26. In the case of J$ the difficulty is of a different nature from that 
 spoken of in 5} 22 above. Thus, for example, the word for say thou (m.) 
 is "1/J2X' the ^ having a Moving Shva and the Qa-. But the {«{ and 
 the ~ beneath it having each of them no pronunciation-value, all that 
 could be pronounced would be ")ft which means myrrh. The difficulty 
 of notifying the presence of the X i s avoided by the use of a compound 
 form (■*■ in this case) for the Moving Shva beneath the {$; so that tho 
 word becomes ""l/btf r niour, in which there is approximation to e-sound 
 
 before saying niour. 
 
 * d, Ka,\imets-Khautuph. 
 
 t Rarely, ^ is for 5 K. Khautiiph (p. 6, J), cp. Ez. 26. 9.— Gesenius, in 
 " Grammaticis legibus contrariuin et non ferendum est i?3P", Thes. p. 1190, 
 mistook the TT; so, too, in * , 3L?p- — Some books have "? (6), uot tT 
 
12 QUIESCENT LETTERS. 
 
 27. The following words may be 
 
 1. Y*£l choose ye (m.) 
 
 2. V)3 be ye (m.) fruitful 
 
 3. yip draw thou (m.) near 
 
 4. iH ink 
 
 5. v^| a bucket 
 
 6. t TJ'l|il thy (ni.) back 
 
 7. Tp*V5.3 thy (f.) young lions 
 
 8. p wine 
 
 9. npb thou (f.) hast put 
 
 10. JVW thou (f.) hast kept 
 
 11. *h$ a pestle 
 
 12. *7Pl sickness 
 
 • t; 
 
 13. vHn he hath made sick 
 
 14. tiTrt hither 
 
 15. 
 16. 
 17. 
 18. 
 19. 
 20. 
 21. 
 22. 
 23. 
 24. 
 25. 
 
 26. 
 
 §§ 28, 29. 
 
 read for practice : 
 
 tiwfl a dream 
 
 pTM be strong (m.) 
 
 Y12K be firm (m.) 
 
 *JK I 
 
 *JX a ship, a navy 
 
 V!l be ye (m.) 
 
 ^ty an ornament 
 
 &b$P be will faint 
 
 W 7#* they (m.) will exult 
 
 Dftnft an ostrich (m.) 
 
 t ; ~ 
 
 JTDSnrfi in perverseness 
 
 (plu.) ' 
 nVnn/^l and to cause to 
 
 live. 
 
 IV. Quiescent Letters. 
 
 28. From the principle of the use of Shva (§ 3) it follows 
 that every consonant must have belonging to it either a 
 vowel or a Shva marking the absence of any vowel. At the end 
 of a word where the — is not written, in accordance with § 4, 
 it yet belongs to the letter and must be borne in mind as 
 understood. 
 
 29. But there are four letters ^HX which may be said to 
 vanish in certain cases. The term Quiescent may be applied to 
 them, but the term so applied should be carefully defined. 
 
 Def. Any one of the letters ^HX is said to be Quiescent 
 when it, at the end of a syllable, 
 
QUIESCENT LETTERS. §§ 29, 30. 13 
 
 (1) is fused in the vowel before it, so as 
 
 (2) to vanish (in pronunciation), and 
 
 (3) not to require, or have, Shva quiescent (either written 
 in the middle of a word* or understood at the end). 
 
 [N.B. (i) No one of ♦lnX can have a vowel belonging to it 
 when it is Quiescent. 
 
 (ii) A syllable ending in a Quiescent Letter is open, § 21 (3).] 
 
 Note, (a) Letters and vowels of the same organ or utterance (pp. 6, 9) 
 may be called homogeneous, others heterogeneous. 
 
 (b) That a letter may vanish in fusion with a vowel, they must be to 
 some extent homogeneous. 
 
 (c) The Labial ") is homogeneous only with vowels of the Class III) (cp. § 20, 
 
 {d) The Palatal » Class II J p. 9. ) 
 
 ( e ) fc$> M are noi heterogeneous with respect to any vocal utterance, 
 
 and we may not say of any vowel that it could not have f"] or N Quiescent 
 after it. 
 
 30. But the only part of the Def. above which can be 
 fully satisfied by tf is the 3rd. It may, in accordance with (3), 
 stand without Shva after a vowel -f* immediately before it. It 
 
 * When of two letters together without a vowel at the end of a word the 
 first one is Quiescent as the * in JVC'V (and so the X in JliO^), the Shva which 
 belongs to the final letter is not marked ; since the case practically falls under 
 § 4, p. 2 rather than § 6. The Shva appears once in each of the two words 
 F1X3 and H^H, see 2 Sam. 14. 2, 3, and in nxyin, in some good Editions, 
 1 Kings 17. 13, although HX2 and n^H occur five or six times with fl not T\, 
 and so nXV^ , JVC'y , and many other such. 
 
 t (1) X with T (Shva Quiescent § 25), as in DtJ'X'., does not come under the 
 Def. in § 29 ; — (2) Nor does X, without vowel or Shva, not immediately preceded 
 by a vowel [Nos. 25, 26, § 36]. This case is not strictly of the same class with 
 that of the Quiescent letters. The X being a mark for Nothing is treated as 
 Nothing in any such a word where it belongs to the word etymologically but 
 needs no recognition in pronunciation. [X is read through, as if not present, 
 in nm, D^rnm, (where the -I is double 1, § 62 (3) and (4))].— (3) In the case 
 of R*|, X*JI, X-17, &c, the X may be assumed to be Quiescent after a Quiescent 
 letter. The reason for this (if there be any) lies in the X. It seems better to say at 
 once (without the assumption) that X may stand unnoticed, as after — , so also 
 after a Quiescent letter which dispenses with Shva. — (4) The X may be dropped, 
 as in > i, ^.—(5) For examples of X (read through, as if not present) between a 
 consonant and its vowel, see Nos. 23—26, § 58.— The letters '•THX are, by some, 
 called ' weak letters.' 
 
14 QUIESCENT LETTERS. §§ 31 — 35. 
 
 lias therefore for ages been classed with the others. There 
 is nothing in it which is at all contradictory to the Definition, 
 and it satisfies this Definition as far as it can. 
 
 31. The H is never Quiescent anywhere else than at the 
 end of a word. At the end of a word, H (without a vowel) is 
 always Quiescent unless it has a dot within it — thus H. This 
 dot is called Mappek, and signifies that the letter is to have 
 its full consonantal value. See Exs. 12, 21, § 36. 
 
 32. 1 (§ 29, Note c) may be Quiescent in the case of 
 only Khoulem and Shurik. After any other vowel, ") has its full 
 consonantal v- value (as in Exs. 14, 15, 16, § 36). 
 
 33. * (§ 29, Note d) may be Quiescent in the case of 
 
 only Kherik, Tsa-re, and Segol. After any other vowel, * has 
 its full consonantal y-value (as in Exs. 17, 24, § 36). 
 [For *< mute, see § 35.] 
 
 34. The term Mappek (§ 31) means causing to go forth. It expresses 
 well, therefore, that the consonant bearing it is to be brought out in pro- 
 nunciation. The 1 and the * also, when consonantal (not quiescent) after 
 a vowel in the same syllable, may be said to have Mappek although the dot 
 is not now put in their case. 
 
 35. When a word ends in V — (i- e. in — followed by * and 
 this by 1 each without a vowel), the case is, strictly, one of a 
 word ending in two consonants without a vowel to either of them ; 
 and, if both these were to be pronounced, Shva would stand 
 beneath each of them* (§ 6, p. 2). The absence of Shva from 
 them shews that they are not to be both of them pronounced ; 
 and this accords with what is conventionally accepted among 
 Hebrew Scholars, viz. that the * in such a case is Mute and the 
 pronunciation exactly the same as if no * were present. Only 
 one consonant (the )) being recognized as present, the Shva 
 belonging thereto is as usual understood (not written). 
 
 * Some speak of such heterogeneous Combinations as '•^r, *~, ''i, 1~, 
 )~T% &c, as Diphthongs. Since, however, 1 and > when not Quiescent (according 
 to §§ 32, 33) have their full consonantal value, these combinations are syllabic 
 and there is always Shva (understood when not expressed) beneath the 1 and 
 the "> in each case ; as in Exs. 14 — 17, 23, 24, (§ 36). — Conversely, 1. or \ (or any 
 letter with — ) is consonantal according to § 5, p. 2. ' 
 
QUIESCENT LETTERS. § 36. ACCENTS. § 37. 
 
 15 
 
 36. The following words may be given here as examples 
 of closed and open syllables, and for practice in readme- : — 
 
 1. tftfa ahead 
 
 2. ,1ft- what? 
 
 3. & and fctfp would that ! 
 
 (also if) 
 
 4. fit this 
 
 5. (12 thus 
 
 6. trcy'|*n heads 
 
 7. JW|N"1 beginning 
 
 8. [te*J*n first 
 
 9. iTlX3 a bough 
 
 T 
 
 10. n^T he will do 
 
 11. WDil thou (m.) wast high 
 
 12. H3 in her 
 
 T 
 
 13. "HSrO it (m.) was turned 
 
 14. iri a mark 
 
 T 
 
 15. 1¥ a precept 
 
 16. 13 a back 
 
 17. *13 a nation 
 
 18. Wfi outside 
 
 19. S|W he will add 
 
 20. mil an aunt 
 
 T 
 
 21. PHl^l her uncle 
 
 22. \TP| my bosom 
 
 23. JT?1J depravity 
 
 24. *J^ my eyes (in pause 
 
 25. XDn sin 
 
 26. X*5 a valley. 
 
 V. Accents. 
 
 37. Every Hebrew word either 
 
 (1) has an Accent belonging to it, or 
 
 (2) is (in the Bible) followed in the line of con- 
 sonants by a small horizontal dash (")* called Makkeph, which 
 marks therefore Absence of Accent from any word followed by it. 
 
 38. The Hebrew Accents serve 
 
 I. as Accents simply, marking (in most"f cases) the ac- 
 
 * "When there are more than one between two words, their value is the same 
 as that of one alone. There may be more than two words connected by Mak- 
 keph. All words so connected count as one word. [Makkeph, and MappSk 
 (§ 31), are strictly Aramaean Participles Pp[?D and p" 1 ???.] 
 
 f There are six which stand away from the syllable which they accent. 
 
1G ACCENTS. §§ 38, 39. 
 
 cented syllable, i. e. the syllable on which the chief stress is laid 
 in words of more than one syllable ; — all of them are equal in 
 mere accent- value ; — 
 
 II. for purposes of Interpunctuation, some (called Distinc- 
 tive, or Disjunctive, Accents) marking Stops of greater or less 
 duration, others (called Conjunctive Accents) marking close- 
 ness-of-connection of one word with the following one ; 
 
 III. as Music-marks in accordance with which the verses 
 were chaunted. This use (from which the uses I. and II. may 
 seem to follow derivatively) we are not concerned with here : 
 it is a matter for Musicians. 
 
 [N. B. In citing a word from the Bible, it is unscholarly to cite the 
 Accent with it ; except in any case in which the Accent is required for 
 illustration.] 
 
 39. There are 18 Distinctive or Disjunctive and 8 Conjunc- 
 tive Accents. [See Appendix B.] The latter have all the same 
 connecting value. Of the Disjunctives it is unnecessary to 
 mention here more than two : viz. 
 
 (1) — Silluk ; which is always attached (below the line) to 
 the accented syllable of the last word only in each verse, and is 
 always followed by ( : ) * placed immediately after the word, 
 thus 
 
 (2) — Ethn&kh ; which is attached, below the line, to the 
 accented syllable f of that word (other than the last one of a 
 verse) on which there is made the chief rest or stop. Take, for 
 example, the verse Gen. 33. 9, "And Esau said, I have enough : 
 — my brother, to thyself be that which is thine." Here the chief 
 stop in the midst of the verse is placed in the Hebrew Bible on 
 "Enough "I (2~\) which is marked with (— ), and the last 
 word of the verse is marked with (; — ) thus, • T? 
 
 * Called p-lDQ PpD i.e. end of verse. 
 
 t Some verses have no T. The ~ and x stand, as seen here, to the left 
 of the accented vowel; but when this is not below the line, they stand alone 
 beneath the letter opening the accented syllable ; thus : 73S, ?3*S, :"VIK>. 
 
 X In the English Authorized Version, the stop is (by a slight inaccuracy) 
 placed after " my brother." According to the Interpunctuation standing in the 
 Hebrew Bible, the chief stop being after "enough," the "my brother" belongs 
 to the second part of the verse (as given above). 
 
ACCENTS. §§ 40 — 43. 17 
 
 40. These two accents Silluk, and Ethndkh, marking the 
 chief rests or stops or Pauses, are called " Pause Accents." And 
 
 41. The Pause form of a word is a form of it in which the 
 word is more or less changed from its natural state by reason of 
 the stop or Pause. Thus, in the two words just given, — ^1 
 is the Pause form of i*l (which last is the word in its natural 
 state), and T? is the Pause form of TO. Also, the vowel 
 adopted by reason of the ' Pause' may be called a " Pause-voivel." 
 
 This will be more fully understood hereafter. The mere 
 statement is all that can be given at present. 
 
 These two Accents are especially the Pause Accents. Pause 
 Forms, however, are used with some few other Distinctive 
 Accents to be mentioned hereafter. 
 
 42. In Hebrew the only syllables that can be accented (or 
 bear the Tone, as it is called) are the last* and the last but 
 onef. As the accented syllable is called the Tone-syllable, this 
 may be stated thus : — 
 
 N.B. The Tone-syllable cannot be further from the end of 
 a Hebrew word than last but one. 
 
 |_43. But though there can be no Tone-accent on any other 
 than either the last or the penultimate syllable, there is a sub- 
 sidiary half-accent — Metheg \ ( as ^ i s called) which can be 
 attached to earlier syllables. This mark ] as the same form 
 indeed as, but cannot be mistaken for, Silluk (§39 (1)) : for, its 
 place is not the place of Silluk, and this latter always has ( : ) 
 at the end of its word. Metheg is never a tone-accent ||. 
 
 Metheg may occur more than once (with different syllables) 
 in one word. Any accent attached to a syllable further from 
 
 * The accent is then said to be JTl/P mi-Vra (meaning below). This term 
 may also be used of the word so accented. 
 
 t The accent is then said to be W^P mi-Vel (meaning above). This term 
 may also be used of the word so accented. 
 
 X Also ^HXQ mii-iVrt'kh, and p-TVn Kheruk sometimes; and tOya ga-yd 
 (especially when with Shva). 
 
 || It is better not to follow some of the "Writers on Hebrew Grammar by 
 giving ~ as the general mark for a Tone-accent. (It looks like either Metheg, 
 or Silluk, — and cannot well be this last in some words). We will adopt, rather, 
 " where it may be necessary to mark an accented syllable. 
 
 2 
 
18 METHEG. § 43, 44. 
 
 the end of a word than last but one, is not to be considered as 
 a tone-accent there, but only in the place of Meiheg. 
 
 Metheg is a Hebrew word ypfo meaning a bridle; and, as its name 
 implies, it may be said to serve as a check to the course of the utterance of 
 a word. It is a means, thus, of preserving distinctness of pronunciation, 
 not only by (1) checking a too rapid accumulation * of syllables upon the tone- 
 syllable of the word, but also (and, perhaps it may be said, more especially) 
 by (2) interfering where otherwise indistinctness of articulation might arise 
 from either too great similarity in the utterance of the end of one syllable 
 and the beginning of the next, or from some difficulty caused by sudden 
 change in the frame or posture of the organs of speech in passing from 
 syllable to syllable. 
 
 For the purposes of (1), the usual position of Metheg is with the syllable 
 third from (i.e. next but one before) the tone; but the Metheg is generally 
 dropped f, or placed with the preceding syllable (if there be one in the 
 word), where the third syllable from the tone ends in a quiescent Shva : — 
 
 For the purposes of (2) the cases of its occurrence are multitudinous. 
 A multiplicity of rules, and exceptions thereto, would be practically useless. 
 The only real guide to its use is Euphony. 
 
 N.B. In Hebrew Composition, neither Metheg nor any Tone-Accent 
 is put. 
 
 44. (i) With an unaccented Long Vowel which is followed 
 immediately by a Moving Shva there is generally a Metheg. But 
 
 (ii) with a Short vowel followed immediately by Shva 
 (whether Moving or Quiescent J) there is generally no Metheg. 
 
 Hence is obtained a rough and ready means of helping the 
 tyro 
 
 (a) to recognize as Long Vowels some which he might at 
 
 * Or, making a prolongation, as the name "pIXD given in § 43, note %, may 
 be rendered. 
 
 + It may be there, nevertheless, owing to (2) — i.e. for Euphonic reasons. 
 
 X Some instances occur of Metheg with a short Vowel followed by Shva 
 Quiescent. This is, of course, especially the case where a Metheg is wanted to 
 check the iitterance for the sake of Eivphony. Thus we have NKHF) Gen. 1. 11 
 (according to some, the ~ is omitted by others) ; iTrP and the like forms, very 
 many times: and so, n'VrP, i\)7i\, fV.nl, &c. This is really the case in such 
 words as PH.DJSO in the case of the p ; for, the first syllable being (»)p (as will 
 be seen presently, § 53) virtually ends in Shva Quiescent. Similarly in D3/FI3 
 and Drpn3 (in each of which the T is 8), the first syllable is hot, a Shva 
 Quiescent being understood at the end of the first syllable (as will be seen, § 53). 
 It should be observed that the exceptions here mentioned are not exceptions to 
 44 (i) but only to (ii) and (b). Eather too much importance is attached by some 
 to this means of distinguishing between the Long and Short ^r. 
 
METHEG. §§ 44—46. 19 
 
 first mistake for short vowels ; as, for instance, the Defective 
 Long-Kherik (§ 9) in !)XT1 Is. 59. 19, and they shall fear, and 
 Deficient Shurik {§ 11) represented by the — in DD?2il Deut 
 11. 24, your (m.) territory* ; 
 
 (b) to distinguish at sight {sometimes, however, only) be- 
 tween Kaumets and Kaumets-Khautuph : — thus in Hft^n Zech. 
 
 t : it 
 9. 2, she was wise, the — beneath ft, — having Metheg, — is a 
 
 Long vowel and is therefore not o but Kaumets ; whereas 
 
 in flD^n Is. 11. 2 wisdom, the — beneath H, — without Metheg, 
 m t 
 
 — is not Kaumets, but o Kaumets Khautuph. Since, however, 
 
 (c) a Metheg is generally given to a vowel which imme- 
 diately precedes a Comjjound Shva, — a — before -^- may be 
 6 although accompanied by Methegf : thus, \3X1 1 Kings 9. 26. 
 
 (d) Moreover the Metheg remains with such a vowel, after 
 which there would naturally be a Compound Shva, even when 
 the Compound Shva adopts a vowel form (as will be explained 
 by and by, § 56) : thus, Tj^nX Ps. 61. 5 where H is for H. 
 
 (e) When two Accents occur on the same word, the second 
 marks the Tone and the first is reckoned only as a Metheg — 
 half-accent : except in the Psalms, Proverbs, and Jub. 
 
 45. Metheg is often, though not always, placed with an 
 unaccented £ Long vowel which should be shortened into a 
 Short vowel but of which the long form is retained. 
 
 Hebrew Accentuation is a subject to be more fully treated 
 of hereafter ; but we may mention here that 
 
 46. When a word with a Disjunctive accent on its opening 
 syllable would be preceded by a word having a Conjunctive accent 
 on its last syllable, this Conjunctive accent is often turned back 
 to the penult. syllable|| if there be one and then is reekoned 
 only as a Metheg — half-acceut. This is called linN JliDJ.] 
 
 T T J 
 
 * It must not be supposed that Defective Long Vowels can always be thus 
 known. They are often without Metheg. All that is said above is with refereuce 
 to the case of their being ' followed immediately by a Moving Shva.' 
 
 t There are cases in which jf before ^f is the Long-v; as, for instance, 
 when it is for a lengthened "=" as in n*3XH. This will be understood by and by. 
 
 + i. c. not having any Tone-accent. 
 
 || Sometimes the accent remains on the Tone- syllable, the other one adopting 
 a different form. 
 
 O 9 
 
20 DAUESii. §§ 47, 48. 
 
 VI. Dagesh. 
 
 47. It was mentioned (§ 7) that, of the Alphabet, six letters* 
 
 have a dot belonging to them in a sense. This dot, which is 
 called Dagesh Lene, may be said to belong to each of these 
 6 letters 
 
 (1) at the beginning of a word (with the exceptions men- 
 tioned presently in § 48), 
 
 (2) after a Quiescent"^ Shva, anywhere [See Nos. 1, 3, G, 
 12 — 14, § 58] ; — but (when not at the beginning of a word) 
 
 N.B. it is dropped after aught else than — Quiescent. — 
 
 48. Any one of those six letters at the beginning of a word 
 loses its dot when the preceding word ends in a long vowel 
 or quiescent-letter and is closely read along with J the word so 
 beginning. Thus, 
 
 * For remembering these, the mnemonic form-word B'gad-li'phath has 
 often been employed. 
 
 t The V\ (i.e. P he final) has not the Dagesh-lene in Sjpifl Prov. 30. 6, from 
 P|pin the P| of which remains as it was — probably in order that the shortened 
 form may be like in sound to the original word so far.— But generally when there 
 are two consonants at the end of a word without a vowel to either of them the 
 last of the two has its D. Lene when it is one of the six letters for D. L. This 
 D. L. is retained too even when the first of the two Shvas (§ 6) is replaced by a 
 vowel, as will hereafter be seen to be the case, in such words as fiyOfc?, "^IT, &c, 
 belonging to classes Fl?J?S, TY|, &c, with two Shvas at the end; and so the 
 appearance of the Shva with the last letter is accounted for, because the case is 
 virtually one of § 6, p. 2. 
 
 J i.e. either has a Conjunctive Accent, or is followed by Makkeph which 
 shews that it has no Accent at all. If there be a Disjunctive Accent § 38, n. 
 (however small in value) on the first of the two words, there is a stop made on 
 that word, which is then not read closely along with the following word. — [The 1 
 and * following any other vowels than one of those with which they can be 
 Quiescent (§§ 32, 33), have Shva Quiescent understood though not expressed 
 beneath them at the end of a word (cp. § 35 note *). And the Dagesh 
 
DAGESH. §§ 48, 49. 21 
 
 For Example, we have in Gen. 19. 12 HS j!?™, but T*$5 jj?' 21 ; 
 y&Pi ih m Geu - 4 - 7 > and 5]ph"J<S (4) »■ 12, but >3 nV'> Gen. 18. 15; 
 <Q Vgfo Gen. 2. 3 and p"*n*l (7! Gen - 1- 7 &c -> but DV5 ^ (8) Gen - 3 - 5 ' - 
 where the — in (1), (3), (6), is a Conjunctive Accent, — the — in (2), (5), 
 and the dot above the middle of the 3 i Q (8), are Disjunctive Accents. 
 
 [For some apparent exceptions to this great Rule, see App. C.] 
 
 N.B. Dagesh Lene belongs only to the six Letters, 
 • ft ,3 ,2 ,1,3,3 
 
 49. There is another Dagesh, which appears not only in 
 those 6 letters bat in all the others (except the 5 "lyrVlX*). 
 Dagesh Forte, as it is called, is said to double -f- the letter in 
 which it stands. It can only stand immediately after a vowel 
 
 Lene therefore stands in an initial D 2 3 1 3 2 after a word ending in 1 or * in 
 such a case. There is nothing to bring the case under § 48. Three exceptions 
 however are noted in the margins of most Bibles, viz. Is. 34. 11, Ez. 23. 42, 
 Ps. 68. 18 ; in the first of which J"l, and in the others 3, is said to be l"ID"l. 
 
 (i) PIS"! means weak, i.e. without the strengthening dot. HS1 is used also 
 of a letter without Dagesh Forte; and also of a letter without Mappek §§ 31, 34. 
 The mark (-) was anciently placed over a letter which is thus !"I2"I (weak)] and 
 
 (ii) the term HS") is sometimes applied to the mark. This mark is still 
 seen over a letter in some places of the Hebrew Bible, and may be said to imply 
 absence of power, — whether the Slight power of Dagesh Lene, or the Strung of 
 Dagesh Forte, or that of a letter which can lose its poiver (as H and \ and ' do 
 when Quiescent). — -With these N might, perhaps, be classed according to § 30]. ■ 
 
 * But it appears in N, -1ST Job 33. 21 (omitted by some). The dot in {< in 
 Gen. 43. 26, Lev. 23. 17, Ezra 8. 18, is not a Grammatical Dagesh. Some sup- 
 pose it to be a Mappek, although the N is here not in the same syllable with the 
 vowel before but has a vowel of its own. The letter T was anciently reckoned 
 among those which admit D. forte. This D. occurs in "1 in Ez. 16. 4 twice, 
 Frov. 14. 10, Cantic. 5. 2: — in some few other places "I has a Euphonic D. 
 
 + See more fully Appendix C. We may mention here that this D. forte 
 is sometimes used to make up or ' compensate ' for some letter omitted before 
 the letter in which the D. is placed, in which case some would call it a 
 'Compensating Dagesh F.' Sometimes D. forte is a characteristic-mark of a 
 set of Noun-forms or Verb-forms, in which case some would call it a ' Ciiakac- 
 tekistic Dag. F.' These terms may be useful to us by and by ; but it is un- 
 necessary to classify cases of Dagesh-forte under these names, and so far wo 
 may agree with Dr Ewald (Lehrb. p. 69) in thinking the names superfluous. 
 
22 
 
 §5 
 
 (which vowel belongs, of course, to the preceding Consonant) ; 
 and 
 
 N.B. This vowel can only be either a short vowel, or an 
 accented* long one [Nos. 2, 10, &c, and 21, (§ 58)]. 
 
 50. It follows from this last that — not accented, and fol- 
 lowed immediately by Dagesh, is not a Long vowel, and there- 
 fore is the short one o [No. 20, (§ 58)]. 
 
 51. Five Rules, which are involved in what has been said above, may 
 bj borne in mind with advantage by the Beginner ; viz. 
 
 i. Dagesh after a vowel is Dagesh-Forte as in ij^ (ap-pce) ; 
 
 ii. Dagesh after a Shva is Dagesh-Lene as m*T"^J zav-dee). 
 
 iii. In the middle, or at the end of a word, Dagesh-Lene cannot occur 
 except after — quiescent ; — and consequently 
 
 iv. A word that begins with one of the six, ft, £, *)» % 5> 3> must lose 
 the D.-Lene on receiving a prefix not beai'ing Shva Quiescent. 
 v. The five letters 1 V H H X ^° n °t admit Dagesh. 
 
 52. The last sentence of § 49 must not be supposed to involve its 
 converse. Because Dagesh-Forte cannot come except after a Short or an 
 accented Long vowel, — it by no means follows, of course, that it is to 
 appear always after either of these. 
 
 53. The Dagesh-Forte, as doubling its letter, may be sup- 
 posed to imply a letter which is not written. This letter so 
 implied is understood before the letter having the Dagesh-forte 
 and carries with it a — quiescent*)- understood; thus, the word 
 *jJil my garden may be supposed to represent \30)il. 
 
 54. For the sake of euphony the implied letter is under- 
 stood with that pronunciation which belongs to it when having 
 Dagesh-Lene (if it be one of the six letters for D. L.). Thus 
 
 the son is read hab-ben, not hav-ben. 
 
 * And therefore D. forte cannot properly come after an unaccented Long 
 Vowel. There are several apparent exceptions to this great Kule which may be 
 referred to § 9 N.B., and § 11 N.B. — Several are noted in the margin of the 
 Bible, being in appearance not in accordance with the strict rule for D. forte. — 
 There is another Dagesh : see Appendix C. 
 
 f Hebrew writers express this by saying " Every Dagesh-forte — its power is 
 that of (i.e. it virtually involves) Shva Quiescent." 
 
PRACTICE ON §§ 47, 49, &' 51, 
 
 03 
 
 *** The Student should name the dot seen in a letter here, in each instance 
 
 1. T13 a pit, § 47 (1) 
 
 2. i^ Ins heart, § 51 (i) 
 
 3. *hbm a cluster, §51 (ii) 
 
 4. * "l^n^lSl in the wilderness 
 
 5. ^JH3 thy (/.) morsel 
 
 6. fi^I comminution 
 
 7. H£3 her hand 
 
 8. D^nn the timbrels 
 
 9. flntt? from Zion 
 
 10. Wl our festival 
 
 11. JiB'^S in the gladness ! 
 
 N.B. The Student's attention 
 footnotes here. 
 
 12. ^33 like a pit 
 
 13. H^3 in its (/.) side 
 
 14. ^]>'!P from indignation 
 IS^nSEW Thy quiver 
 
 16. mn53 in the wine presses 
 
 17. Wb*1 and they left him 
 
 15. Pj^l lite the abomina- 
 
 tion 
 
 19. MnPSfi her prayer 
 
 20. T?*?? like Esther 
 21.| % ?rj»l and Mordecai. 
 
 may he specially called to the 
 
 * The division of syllables in this word is known by means of the Shva. 
 This Shva must tie Quiescent, because the dot of the following letter would bo 
 dropped after aught else ({ 47, N.B.); and the term 'Quiescent Shva' 
 stands for a 'Shva at the end of a syllable' (§ 21, Def. 2). 
 
 t This example is given as a means of calling the Student's attention to tho 
 removal of the dot of 113 (No. 1) when the word receives such a prefix as it has 
 here. Comp. § 51 (iv). The Student need not however trouble himself to know 
 anything about this prefix (or any other prefix) at present. 
 
 X In this word, (1) the Shva of the C> is seen to be 'Quiescent,' i.e. at the ' end 
 of a syllable,' because the dot stands in the S after it (§ 47, N.B.), but (2) the Shra 
 of the n is seen to be not Quiescent — because the dot is dropped from the final 
 letter "| which follows that Shva (§ 47, KB.). But Shva is always either Quiescent 
 [§ 21 (2)], or Moving [§ 21 (1)]; and therefore any Shva which is not Quiescent 
 must be Moving. Hence the word is seen to be divided thus ash-pau-th'khau. 
 
 § (1) The Student must be told, at present, that the -^ of O here is u Kaumets 
 Khautuph. (2) The — under "1 is seen to be Quiescent, because the dot stands in 
 the 1 after it. (3) The — under the 1 is seen to be not Quiescent, and therefore 
 Moving, because the dot is dropped from the D after it. (4) The * has its full 
 Consonantal y-value after — . Comp. § 33. 
 
24 rules. § 55. 
 
 VII. Some Principles and Rules. 
 
 55. It Avlll be well for the Student to have certain Principles and Rules brought 
 forward prominently before him here. Some of them he may know already from 
 what has been said above, and some of them follow necessarily therefrom. 
 
 (1) (a) Shva is 'Moving' under the first letter of a word, as 
 in !Tp (k'rdv); [see § 21, Def. (1)]. 
 
 (/?) Shva is 'Quiescent' under the last letter, and under 
 the last two letters of a word, — as in T\fo {ineth) [§ 4], 
 and in pV)* (ydslilc). 
 
 Note carefully the following two Great Principles. They have 
 already been just mentioned in passing. 
 
 (7) There are never two 'Moving' Shvas together anywhere 
 [§ 22, Note (*), p. 10], — and such may never be. 
 
 (S) There are never two 'Quiescent' Shvas together any- 
 where else than at the end of a word [comp. § 6 
 N.B., p. 2], — and such may never be. 
 
 (e) ITence, whenever there are two Shvas together in the midst of a word 
 (as in -l7pP1), since by (7) they are not both of them 'Moving,' 
 and by (8) they are not both of them ' Quiescent,' one of them must 
 be 'Quiescent' and the other 'Moving.' And, — since 
 
 (£) It cannot be that the first one is 'Moving' and the second 
 ' Quiescent,' i.e. there cannot be a vowelless letter at the beginning 
 of a syllable followed immediately by a vowelless letter at the end 
 of the syllable,— because there is no syi.laht.k without a vowel 
 [$ 1G (/3)]; -therefore it follows that 
 
rules. § 55 (2)-(6). 25 
 
 (2) Of two Shvas together, in the midst of a word, the first is 
 
 always 'Quiescent' and the second always 'Moving." 
 Now 
 
 :Since, (tj), Dagesh-Lene occars only either at the beginning of a word 
 [§ 47 (1)], or after a Shya 'Quiescent' [§ 47 (2)]; it follows 
 that a Shva under a Dagesh-Lene is always* 'Moving,' — 
 either because it is under the first letter of a word as in 
 '"12 (b're(), or because it is the second of two Shvas together 
 as in *irip3 {nis-Vru), comp. (2) above. 
 And since, (0), Dagesh-Forte implies a Shva 'Quiescent' before it, it follows 
 that a Shva under a Dagesh-Forte is (by implication) the 
 second of two Shvas together and therefore 'Moving' 
 [comp. (2) above] as in -"PSD (sa(p)-prit). 
 
 Hence, from (tj) and (0) together, it is seen that 
 
 (3) Shva under a Dagesh is always* 'Moving.' Again 
 
 Since, (j), each of the six letters of § 47 has Dagesh-Lene after a Shva 
 'Quiescent' [§ 47 (2)], it follows that whenever a Shva occurs 
 before one of those six letters without its Dagesh the 
 Shva cannot be Shva 'Quiescent' — for then there would bo 
 Dagesh-Lene in the letter after it. Hence 
 
 (4) Shva is always 'Moving' before any one of the letters 
 
 fl £ 3 *l J 1 without its Dagesh-L. as in ^t33 (nl-t'plic), 
 !ft$* (ye-sh'vu). Also 
 
 Since, («),tho Dagesh-Lene is dropped after AUGHT else than Shva 
 * Quiescent' [§ 47 N.B.] — and therefore is dropped not only 
 after any vowel but also after a Shva ' Moving,' — it follows that 
 whenever a Dagesh t is seen standing immediately after a 
 Shva, this Shva is not 'Moving' and therefore is ' Quiescent' ; 
 in other words 
 
 (5) Shva immediately before a Dagesh f is 'Quiescent'; as 
 
 in IStJO (nish-pou), !Q£y* (yish-bu). — And, necessarily, 
 
 Since, (\), a 'Moving' Shva under any one of the four letters JfnriN 
 always adopts a Compound form [§ 24] ; it follows that 
 
 (6) A simple — [§ 25] under one of JJ H Pi N is 'Quiescent.' 
 
 * Except, of course, at the end of a word, as in "T)* {yerd). 
 t Which can only be D.-lene, for D. -forte can only come after a vowel (§ 49). — 
 The exceptional words D)FltJ* *Wt^ CR^', will be noticed hereafter. 
 
26 rules. § 55. 
 
 But it is necessary to state 
 
 (7) ' Rule I :' Shva after a vowel bearing a Tone- Accent is 
 generally Quiescent * [So No. 17, § 58] ; and 
 
 (8) 'Rule II:' Shva after an unaccented Long-vowel is 
 
 Moving, 
 
 [Note] except, apparently, at the end of some words having a Long 
 vowel in a closed final syllable where the Long-vowel is retained when the 
 Tone-accent is removed and the word followed therefore by Makkeph. 
 (See some Examples in Note (*) on p. 25). 
 
 ["This ' Rule II' is important. It is indirectly a means of determining 
 the Tone-syllable in very many words, as may be seen thus : — 
 
 (i) In such words as V^bD the Dag. L. in the ft shews - [(5) p. 23] 
 
 ■ : |t > 
 
 that the — of } is Quiescent. But, according to ' Rule II,' this -r- (fol- 
 lowing the Long- Vowel — ) must be Moving if the — be unaccented. 
 Therefore, either this great 'Rule II' must be broken here, or the — can- 
 not be unaccented, i.e. it must be accented ; and so the Penultimate is seen 
 to be the Tone-syllable. So, too, in such words as *5DF) tne Tone-syllable 
 
 is the Penultimate ; for, the Dag. Forte (§51. i.) in the ^ virtually involves 
 -j- Quiescent (§ 53), and therefore the — must bear the Tone, or 'Rule II' 
 would be broken. The same holds for Nos. 17 and 21 (§ 58); and, of 
 course, in the case of any other Long- vowel as well as for — . 
 
 (ii) So in such words as Q ,,> ") ,, £^ the last is the Tone- syllable. For, since 
 
 the Shva understood beneath the Q (§ 4) must be Quiescent (in a closed 
 syllable at the end of the word [§21, (1)]), therefore the Long- vowel before 
 that Shva cannot be unaccented, or 'Rule II' would be broken. So, too, 
 in such words as rhlfi, riVOI, tDl3X, 2313 ( the ~ bein g Long), the 
 last is the Tone-syllable. Some exceptions (apparently), when there is a 
 Makkeph, were referred to just above [Note]. But the general statement 
 may be made, that 
 
 (9) (a) Where a Long-Vowel has after it a Shva that is known to be 
 Quiescent, the Tone-accent (if there be one) is on that Long- Vowel. And 
 
 * The exceptions are chiefly where the Rule seems to be disregarded in order 
 to keep up a correspondence in sound with that of a simpler form of the word 
 in each case. Thus JV2 ba-yith retaining the tone-accent on the first syllable ba 
 allows the yith to become y'thau in H1V3, in pause :nJV2,-— Pb. 68. 7, 
 Is. 14. 17, &c. Similarly the veth of ni^H becomes v'thau in Pinion Ps. 116. 15; 
 and so for the last word of v. 3, the 3rd of v. 4, and the last of v. 5, in Ps. 103. 
 Thus, too, r\~\V*r\ in Josh. 17. 15 (Dr Ewald, in his Lehrb. p. 65, says that J? ia 
 wrong ' unrichtig' here, and that the better editions have J?, but ?). The Rale 
 
KULES. ^T FOR 0. §55 (10). 27 
 
 (b) that vowel is generally* shortened if the accent be removed. 
 
 An Example or two of this, by way of illustration, may be given here, — 
 if we may make another slight digression. — Thus, the last syllable of the 
 word CI!"! [Ex. 14. 16] bears the Accent in accordance with what has been 
 said. But when the Accent is turned back from the last syllable to the last- 
 but-one, the ■=■ would be unaccented; and ' Rule II.' would therefore be 
 broken if the — were to remain [since the Shva understood beneath the Q is 
 not Moving at the end of the word, §21, and §55(1)]. To avoid this, the ~ is 
 shortened into -»-, thus Q^n [2 Kings 6. 7, where the t is a Conjunctive 
 
 Accent (App. B)]. So S*t?ri, or 2&ft, becomes ^gjfjrj ; &c. So, in § 58, 
 the word No. 15 would be "V)} 7 , if without the \ which is there prefixed. 
 In No. 15 the accent has been drawn away/;'om the last to the penultimate 
 syllable; and, to avoid the breach of ' Rule II.' by the unaccented !) having 
 a Shva not Moving but Quiescent after it (beneath the "j), the !) has been 
 shortened into ~w (o) K. Khautuph. Again, when 73 (all, cccry) is followed 
 by Makkeph (§_37) and so is seen to be unaccented, the _^ is shortened 
 into T (0) K. Kh., as in No. 16 (§ 58). — Similarly, the _i. of No. 17 is short- 
 ened into 6 in No. 18, — where the ^~r must bear the Tone, by (a) above. — 
 So, as the Student will easily see, in Nos. 19 and 20 the T must be a 
 Short-vowel and therefore 6. So, too, we see that 
 
 (10) (a) It follows from (8), that an unaccented -7- followed 
 by a Shva that is known to be Quiescent is — Kaumets Khautuph. 
 Except, of course, in one of the exceptions to 9 (b). See Note * below. 
 [Also, — is 0, as seen above § 44 (b), (c), (d), 
 
 (b) if without -j- before — , generally, as in ri/D¥J7 Is. 40. 29 ; — 
 
 And often even with — , if 
 
 (c) before -^- , as in *7£V * Lev. ] 6. 10, — but see p. 19, note t — 
 
 -'it 
 
 (d) or before a — for -p-, as in Q*12W Dent 13. 3; — 
 
 •• : tit 
 
 And, also, as seen above § 50, 
 
 (c) if unaccented and followed immediately by Dagesh ; 
 which case is really the same in principle as (a). 
 
 To which may be added 
 
 (f) A — , for Shva (whether Simple or Compound), is o ; 
 of which more will be seen hereafter, § 5G, &c.]l 
 
 however is not always disregarded in such like words. 
 
 * The exceptions are chiefly those mentioned just above in (8) [Note] ; thus, 
 the 1 of DV is retained in ~DV, and so the s •• in "pS and "JV3; and so the Long 
 — of *7V in "*iy Gen. 27. 33 ; and so in "D s Num. 34. 3, &c, but we very often 
 have "D^ which is according to Enle. 
 
 In "IV above, the 1 might go on to TV [thus TV*7jV (§ 37 *)h ^o also in 
 some other cases ; but, perhaps, not in all. 
 
28 RULES, § 55. — SLIGHT- VOWEL, § 56. 
 
 [We may here re-state (7), (8), & (9), thus, generally ; — 
 'Rule I.' A — after an Accented vowel is 'Quiescent'; 
 'Rule II.' A — after an Unaccented Long-Yowe\ is 'Moving.' 
 (9) (a) "Where a Long- vowel stands before a — which is known 
 to be 'Quiescent/ that Yowel has the Accent of the 
 word; and 
 (b) If the Accent be removed, that Yowel is shortened [p. 27(*)].] 
 
 (11) 'Rule III.' A — is 'Moving' under a letter followed im- 
 
 mediately by the same letter, as in w;?] (hd-l'lu)* 
 
 (12) 'Rule IV.' A — is usually 'Quiescent' after a 'Real' 
 
 Short- VOWel f [}-e. one which does not mask Shva, § 56]. 
 This brings us to a more important matter. Very often a 
 vowel which looks like an ordinary Short- vowel is not 
 a ' Real ' vowel, but merely a Shva masked by a vowel- 
 form, — and does not belong to 'Rule IV at all. — For 
 
 (13) (a) Since there may not be two 'Moving' Shvas together 
 
 [comp. (7) on p. 24], it follows that 
 
 (b) Whenever in the process of word-forming there would 
 
 be two 'Moving' Shvas together, some change must be 
 
 made. The change usually made is as follows 2 
 
 56. The first of two 'Moving' Shvas which would occur 
 
 together is replaced by a Short- vowel ; and such a vowel (so 
 
 masking a Shva, and followed by Shva 'Moving' under the next 
 
 letter) is called l"Hp Hl^Pl a Slight voicel.% 
 
 [This is not so much of a ' Real ' vowel as to have Shva Quiescent after it, or to 
 hear a Tone-accent. It represents merely a Slight vowel-sound given to the first of 
 what would else be three combined consonants, — because in Hebrew no more than two 
 (p. 10, Note *) are ever allowed to be combined with one vowel following them.] 
 
 It may be useful to have an example or two of this. An 
 
 easy means of illustrating the principle is furnished by the 
 
 * Hence such words as *J3l2p* Ps. 1. 23, ^N"^ etc. Prov. i. 28, are seen to he 
 exceptions to ' Pule I.' For the accent — see p. 17, note || . 
 
 f Words like DS"}^, EprVTffl, are perhaps exceptions to this 'Rule IV.* 
 % The names 'Compulsory Vowel' and 'Auxiliary Vowel,' which have been pro- 
 posed instead, fail to express the slight nature of the vowel. The name Auxiliary 
 Vowel is liable to the further objection that it would suit rather the vowel which 
 is introduced sometimes to help out the utterance of a guttural letter at the end of 
 a word (see § GO), which has nothing in common with this. 
 
SLIGHT VOWEL. §§ 56, 57. 29 
 
 three prefixes 2 in or by, 3 as, 7 to or for. When one of 
 these is to be prefixed to a word the first consonant of which has 
 Shva (simple or compound) there would be two MoviDg Shvas 
 together. Since that may not be, the first of the two Shvas 
 adopts a Short-vowel form ; and thus (1)^3 meaning glory of, 
 
 and HfaS) my glory) we have* HM3 M "ltaMW v iO^?(% 
 
 the — under the first letter of (1), (2), (3), being instead of — ; and so the 
 -r (o) in (4), — in (5), — in (6), of 
 
 *TTia ( 4 ) in fury of, T\btib® to truth, *TK3 ( 6 ) as a Kon-\. 
 
 [N.B. When a Slight Vowel has thus taken the place of 
 Shva, another Moving Shva may then appear before it (as 
 need scarcely be said). So we have 1 prefixed to (3) and (6) 
 
 thus ntaafri ro, and nasi ( 8 >]. 
 
 Many other examples of this ' Vowel in the place of (and, as 
 it were, masking) Shva' will occur as we proceed. The Reader 
 will before long be able to recognize as such the -=- in Ha ( 9 ), 
 the -r- in l ?p7M« ( 10 ), and the -*- (o) under the J in H3M ( n ) 
 [Gen. 30. 28], and so in other cases. 
 
 [57. It is scarcely necessary to remark that the second one of the two 
 Moving Shvas (of 'which the first one adopts the Slight-vowel form) is not 
 altered in its nature by the change of the first one. Dr Ewald takes such a 
 Shva to be one of a special nature, as 'floating between two syllable.*' 
 ("zwischen zwei sylbeu schwebeudcs", Index, p. 957), and he gives it a 
 special name "Shva medium." It is a strange thing, — this Shva between 
 two syllables, and belonging " neither wholly to the preceding nor wholly 
 "to the following syllable, but in suspense, standing at the end (?) of a 
 " loosely put-together syllable, in the midst between both" X. We are very 
 
 * For the omission of the dot from the 3 in (1), (2), (3), see § 51 (iv). 
 
 t It is unnecessary, perhaps, to mention that ~ is a very common form of the 
 Slight-vowel, but that the forms "=", T, T, also occur, — and wry often when the 
 Slight-vowel either takes the place of, or precedes (as in 4, 5, 6) a Compound 
 Shva. We may not say that this is always the case. — We find sometimes — under 
 a Guttural, as in npfl Judg. 5. 16, VltDJ} Nah. 2. 9, &c— The whole matter of 
 the Slight-vowel is very important. 
 
 % His words are " ...weder ganz zur vorigen noch ganz zur folgenden sylbe, 
 Bondem schwebt, am endc einer lose zusaniniengesezter sylbe stehend, in der 
 mitte zwischen beiden..." Lehrb. p. 9o. 
 
30 
 
 § 57, 58. 
 
 glad that it has nothing to do with Hebrew, and that therefore we need 
 not trouble ourselves or the Reader any more about it. 
 
 Note. A kind of rolling value is sometimes attributed to a consonant 
 having Euphonic Dagesh, see Appendix C. (§ 71). This value of a con- 
 sonant is marked by the Euphonic Dagesh,— the Shva is innocent of it.] 
 
 58. The following words may be read for practice now. 
 [The accent is vii-Vrd (§ 42, Note „) in Nos. 3, 4, 8.] 
 
 1. n^TlX a locust 
 
 2. O'fiin two myriads 
 
 3. anj^TW they four (m.) 
 
 4. T\12 her pitcher 
 
 5. ^TT ways of 
 
 6. t333"Tl your (m.) way 
 
 7. dpp3 emptiers (m.) 
 
 8. VrD3*l his myriads 
 
 9. DvSiri&n the boasters 
 
 14. fiJlNI thou (f.) wast anx- 
 
 ; : - t 
 
 ious 
 
 15. "IJ*! and he sojourned 
 
 16. v5/5 every vessel 
 
 17. 'Fo'y I prevailed 
 
 18. VJT?^ I prevailed over 
 
 him 
 
 19. 033Ttf your (m.) ear 
 
 20. ^JJIT may He favour us 
 
 21. !)3D* they (m.) shall com- 
 
 pass 
 
 22. toxbft his work. 
 
 (m.) 
 
 10. fipgj and they (m.) kept ^ *(a)'^^ left hand 
 
 11. ^|JJ and they fell 24 •WjTWteTl sins of 
 12 - T!3 and may He rule 25. *( b 'KV fear ye (m.) 
 13. 3£?*1 and he took captive 26. * (c 'd , 'X£Dh men sinning 
 
 * The X is read through as if not there ; — it stands as belonging to the 
 WO rd. — (a) The dot of the IN* goes with the 1, for Full-Khoulem, and is put over 
 the x so as to be close to the consonant (D in 23, L3 in 24) to which the vowel 
 1- (for \) belongs. So, too, in TlltO??, nifcOp. — (b) Here -1 is the vowel for 
 the "1; (the word is read like VrJ). So, too, in -1NS"13 to S. — (c) The — goes with 
 the * as Long-Kherik belonging (as vowel) to the 13, (as if it were thus '•p). So, 
 too, in D^fcOp, to "I. — N.B. The technical term 71113 {'motionless' 1 ) was a 
 means of stating a letter to be without a vowel (which was called ' a motion , ). 
 
31 
 
 Recapitulation of Rules. 
 
 (A) (1) Of two Shvas together in the midst of a word, 
 
 the first is always Quiescent, and the second 
 always Moving [p. 25, (2)]. 
 
 (2) Two Shvas together at the end of a word are 
 
 BOTH OF THEM QUIESCENT [cp. § 21 (2), p. 9]. 
 
 (B) Shva is Moving 
 
 (i) Under a Dagesh [p. 25, (3)], 
 (ii) Before one of the fi 3 3 *1J 2 without its Dag. L. 
 
 [p- 25, (4)], 
 (iii) After an Unaccented LoNG-Vowel* [p. 26, (8)], 
 
 (iv) Under a letter followed by the same letter im- 
 mediately [p. 28, (11)]. 
 
 (C) Shva is Quiescent 
 
 (i) Immediately before a Dagesh [p. 25, (5)], 
 (ii) When in simple form (— ) under one of the letters 
 
 v n n a [p. 25, (6)], 
 
 (iii) After an Accented Vowel [p. 26, (7)], 
 (iv) After a 'Real* Short- Vowel t [p. 28, (12)]. 
 
 (D) (i) A Long- Vowel before a Shva which is known to 
 
 be Quiescent is Accented [p. 26, (9, a)], and 
 
 (ii) If the Accent be removed that Long- Vowel is to be 
 shortened* [p. 27, (9, b)]. 
 
 * For some exceptions see Note (*) on p. 27. 
 
 t For some seeming exceptions see Note (t) on p. 23. 
 
32 FURTIVE PATHAKH. § 60. 
 
 Some Peculiarities of ft, 1> ft, SJ> £*• 
 Note. 
 
 59. Some peculiarities, in the case of ft, ), ft, V> &> &> may- 
 be mentioned here in the following order 
 
 (i) ft, ft> and J? ; 
 
 (ii) & and b (and W) ; 
 
 (iii) V 
 
 (i.) Furtive Pathakh (under ft and ft and y). 
 
 60. (1) A — is always placed under ft (§ 31) and PI and ty 
 
 at the end of a word, when these letters have no 
 vowel of their own,* after any LoNG-Vowel other 
 than — ; and 
 
 (2) When a word so ends in ft or n or y (i.e. in either 
 ft or Pi or V with a — under it), the — is always 
 to be read before the letter above it; as in 
 HSIin hag-be-ah, ft*W see-akh, etc.f 
 
 N.B. Such a — is called Furtive Pathakh. 
 
 (3) Furtive Pathakh is only a means of helping out the 
 utterance of a difficult ^ro^-Consonant after a Long- 
 Vowel of the Classes II and III in §§ 19 and 20. 
 
 (ii.) The Dot of $ and b used sometimes for Khoulem. 
 
 61. The dott of w and & sometimes stands for the Vowel 
 Khoulem, besides distinguishing between sh and s. Thus 
 
 [(A) ft (B) &>],- 
 
 (A) (1) When & has immediately before it a Consonant with 
 
 Deficient Khoulem (§ 13), then, to avoid having two 
 
 dots together, the special dot for the Khoulem is 
 
 dropped and the dot of the & is used for a Khoulem 
 
 * Shva Quiescent being understood, therefore, § 4. 
 
 t As we do not pronounce V, the — of V (in such a case) is sounded alone ; as in 
 J?n re-a, JMJ nu-a. 
 
 % This dot, distinguishing between sh and s, is called the Diacritic Point. 
 
DOT OF W FOR KHOULEM SOMETIMES. §61. 33 
 
 to the preceding Consonant — besides marking the 
 letter to be sh. But 
 
 (2) N.B. The dot of $ never stands so for a — to the 
 preceding letter when that preceding letter is K 
 after a vowel.* Thus t^NI is resh (not re-tfoush), 
 and S^X'H is roush (not rou-Stfoush). 
 
 (3) The Reader may therefore have the following Prac- 
 tical Rule : 
 
 Rule I. In the case of all the letters except & 
 (and except any Quiescent letter of course f) — 
 A Consonant without any Shva, and ap- 
 parently WITHOUT ANY YoWEL-MARK, BEFORE 
 %}, HAS THE DOT OF THE £> FOR ITS YoWEL 
 
 (Khoulem), as in *1$3 bou-shu, tt/3 gou-shu, etc. 
 [Note. — No ambiguity arises from this double use of the dot 
 of £^. For since there must be either a Yowel or Shva to 
 every letter that is not Quiescent (§§ 28 and 29), therefore 
 the Consonant without Shva (before the \j) must have a 
 Yowel ; and there being no Yowel for it, but only the dot of 
 the $ following, it is seen at once that this must be a case for 
 the application of Rule I, — viz. that the dot of the £' is to be 
 read as a Khoulem to the Consonant before it.] 
 
 (4) The dot of \j never stands for Khoulem when the ty 
 either (a) begins a word (as in *W sheer, *QL^ shvu), 
 or (/?) has immediately before it a Yowel J (as in 
 rC3 ge-sheth) or a Shva§ of any kind (as in 1^5 
 g'smi, mn kh'shash). 
 
 * We may add that there is only one word in the Bible (Is. xlvi. 8) in which X 
 with a Deficient Khoulem belonging to it as its vowel is immediately followed 
 by {? , and there the X is not after a vowel but after — . In several editions two 
 dots are given there, one for the Khoulem and one for the E\ — In some words the 
 possibility of taking the dot of U? as a vowel to an X (before it) is guarded against 
 by giving — to the X and so marking the X to be without a vowel; thus Dt'X*. 
 
 t A letter when ' Quiescent' is at the end of a syllable [§20 (Def.)] ; but a 
 letter is not at the end of a syllable if it has a vowel. 
 
 % No letter can have two Vowels at once (§ 16. y). 
 
 § A Shva of any kind shows that the letter above it has no Vowel. 
 
34 DOT OF jy (& £>) FOR KHOULEM SOMETIMES. § 61. 
 
 (B) (5) "When a C has deficient Khoulem {—) for its Vowel, 
 then, to avoid having two dots together, the special 
 dot of the Khoulem is dropped and the dot of the & 
 stands for that J_, besides marking the letter to be s. 
 
 (6) The Reader may therefore have the following Prac- 
 tical Rule. 
 
 Rule II. When W (anywhere else than at the 
 end of a word, § 13 N.B.) stands without a 
 Shva, and apparently without a Yowel, 
 then the £? has its own dot for its Yowel 
 (Khoulem), as in yifc> sou-va, fcWK> sou-ne. 
 
 (7) The dot of V? can never stand for Khoulem when 
 the W has attached to it either (a) any Yowel-mark 
 (as in D&? saum, D^ seem, § 16. 7), or (/3) a Shva (as 
 in y^b^ s'va, nftb M yis-makn). 
 
 The Mark jjj. 
 
 (8) "When a letter immediately before & (s) has belonging 
 to it a — i.e. Deficient Khoulem, the dot for the De- 
 ficient Khoulem is put over the right shoulder of 
 the & (thus W), as in tfb^ nou-se. 
 
 Note. There can be no doubt about the reading in such a 
 case ; for, the letter before the ty having then no Shva and no 
 Yowel-mark other than this dot for Khoulem, this is seen at 
 once to be a case for the application of the following 
 
 Rule III. "When ^ has before it a Consonant 
 without any Shva, and apparently without 
 any Yowel-mark, that Consonant before the 
 t^ has the first dot of the & for its Yowel 
 (Khoulem) [as in Rule I. p. 33], and the second 
 
 DOT MARKS THE LETTER TO BE S. 
 
 N.B. The ^ must then always have either a 
 Vowel-mark belonging to W (s) [as in Pl^tf], or 
 Shva (either expressed, — or understood as in 
 S^Sft tau-phous). 
 
§ 61 (9) & § 62 (1). 35 
 
 (9) When V) (sh) has a Deficient Khoulem (— ) for its 
 Vowel the dot for the Khoulem is put over the left 
 shoulder of the $ (thus j*j), as in *l£^ shou-mer, 
 i&y* yau-shouv.* There can be no doubt about the 
 reading in this case ; for, the V? having then no Shva 
 and no Vowel-mark other than the second dot (for 
 a Khoulem), this is seen at once to be a case for the 
 application of the following 
 
 Rule IV. When $ (anywhere else than at 
 the end of a word, § 13 N".B.) stands WITH- 
 OUT a Shva and without any Vowel (other 
 
 THAN THE SECOND DOT), THE SECOND DOT THEN 
 
 stands for Khoulem and the first dot marks 
 
 only that the letter is sh. 
 N.B. (i). Since the dot of \& is never used for 
 Khoulem at the end of a word (§ 13 
 N.B.), it follows that jy at the end of 
 a word always stands for C? (s) with a 
 Khoulem belonging to the preceding 
 
 LETTER. 
 
 (ii). There is no word in the Language 
 
 HAVING a jy with BOTH ITS DOTS AT ONCE 
 
 representing Khoulem. 
 
 (iii.) 1 Consonantal (sometimes) in i and 1. 
 
 62. Sometimes the 1 in i, and in \ is v Consonantal ; as 
 
 follows, 
 
 (1) When 1 bears a Vowel, f the ) cannot of course be 
 
 itself a Vowel, viz. Full- Khoulem (because one Vowel 
 
 cannot bear another, § 16. 7). The 1 of the ) is then 
 
 * Except only when followed by 1 Consonantal, as in the 2 d Example in § 62 (1). 
 The dot for the Deficient Khoulem is then put over the 1 , as may be seen there. 
 
 t So in the case of 1, the 1 would be 1 Consonantal and the — alone would be the 
 Vowel of the preceding letter. 
 
36 1 CONSONANTAL SOMETIMES IN ] & ) • §62. 
 
 v Consonantal, and the dot above it is a Dcficient- 
 Khoulem belonging to the preceding letter; as in 
 nin hou-vau, T\\p shou-ve. 
 
 (2) When 1 is immediately preceded by a Vowel or a 
 Shva of any kind, the ) cannot itself be a Vowel, viz. 
 Full-Khoulem (because no letter in Hebrew has two 
 Vowels, and no letter can have a Vowel when it has a 
 Shva showing that it has no Vowel, — cp. § 16. £). The 
 1 of the 1 is then v Consonantal, and the dot above 
 is a Deficicnt-Khoulem belonging to the 1 as its 
 Consonant ; as in jitf au-voun, ^iy 'vou-nee. 
 
 (3) "When } is immediately preceded by a vowel, and 
 
 (4) When ) itself has either a vowel or Shva, the 1 is 
 v Consonantal doubled by Dagesh-Forte ; as in 
 ilVl ra(v)-ve, PtttH ri(v)-v'thau. 
 
 Note. It may be observed that each one of the cases 
 (3) and (4) involves the other. 
 
 [Summary of §§ 60-62. 
 
 Furtive — used under H, H or J|, when vowelless at end 
 of a word after any Long- Vowel other than — [§ 60, p. 32]. 
 
 The dot of w used for Khoulem after a Consonant not having 
 either Shva or any vowel other than this dot [Rule I, p. 33]. 
 
 The dot of W used for Khoulem when the W has neither — 
 nor any vowel other than its dot [Rule II, p. 34]. 
 
 One dot of $ for Khoulem [Rules III & IV, pp. 34 & 35}. 
 
 i for — ou v — , p. 35 ; & for vou, p. 36. 
 
 5) for — 0) v — , p. 3G.] 
 
§ 63. APPENDIX A. 
 
 64. 
 
 37 
 
 63. The following words may serve as Examples for prac- 
 tice in Reading. 
 
 1. m Noah 
 
 2. PA") spirit 
 
 3. JT3 fine ashes 
 
 4. P!H scent 
 
 5. nriS^ a key 
 
 6. HTG? her song 
 
 T • 
 
 7. PDil height 
 
 8. PD-I high (m.) 
 
 — T 
 
 9. PD/l/fiD a madman (in 
 
 Eng. V.) 
 
 io. n^^n thou (m.) wilt exalt 26 - p? Equity 
 
 11. y^D a fountain 27. gfaa at the dying of 
 
 17. Sron to rule? 
 
 t ~; 
 
 18. ^'J3n the ruler 
 
 19. 7&fon dominion 
 
 20. B^B* three 
 
 T 
 
 21. EE>3 spice 
 
 22. yi&h abundantly 
 
 23. p^p to have enough 
 
 24. T|X^ thy (m.) hater 
 
 25. ^an^l and I took hold 
 
 12. ^ he will utter 
 
 13. ytiW one (m.) hearing 
 
 14. J"lBO shame 
 
 15. *H^3 I was ashamed 
 
 16. Uh$ti rulers (m.) 
 
 28. HJty her iniquity 
 
 29. gfa one dying 
 
 30. iyp a borrower 
 
 31. "fly a blind man 
 
 32. D^ty* blind men 
 
 * This is strictly the full and proper form of the word, viz. with -"j. — But in all 
 the instances in which the word occurs in the Bible the Dagesh of the 1 is dropped, 
 and the Student has to remember that there is a Dagesh F. properly belonging to the \, 
 
 There are so many instances in which a Dagesh F. is so dropped, over a Shva, 
 that it may be well to call the Eeader's attention specially thereto by the following 
 Observation : — 
 
 Obs. A Dagesh-Forte is often dropped from a letter bearing a Shva, as in v/H 
 (for ^H), -lyp*. (for WEP), etc. This will be better understood by and by. 
 
88 
 [note on appendices (a — e).] 
 
 We give now Five Appendices, viz.: 
 
 (A). On the signification of Vowel-names \ 
 
 (B). On the Accents; 
 
 (C). OnDagesh; 
 
 (D). On Compound Shva; 
 
 (E). On Z^rD and *p. 
 N.B. The Student need not trouble himself with these Appendices 
 at first, hut may refer to them merely as occasion may arise hereafter. He is 
 advised now to proceed at once to work through the Exercise-Book. And while 
 learning therehy to construe Hebrew sentences from The Bible, and also to turn 
 English sentences into Hebrew, he may bo glad to be supplied with a few more 
 Reading-Lessons. As such we give (on pages 55, etc., below) (1) The Hebrew 
 Personal Pronouns (p. 55), (2) A Masculine and a Feminine Noun declined 
 with Pronoun-Affixes, (3) Some specimens of leading Verb-forms in the 
 several Voices. These matters (and others also) are entered into more fully in the 
 Exercise-Book. The Student will find that by familiarizing himself carefully 
 with the words in these Reading-Lessons (pp. 55, etc., below) he will gain great 
 help towards the reading and understanding of the Grammar in the Exercise- 
 Book.. 
 
 APPENDIX A. 
 
 SIGNIFICATION OF VOWEL-NAMES. 
 
 64. Some of the names of the vowels (the more ancient especially) 
 correspond somewhat with the forms of the mouth concerned in the 
 utterances. Thus (1) ' Shurik' ( from p~\ty) ' hissing'' utterance through the 
 lips crvpiyfi.6s. So (2) ' Kherik' (from fi^H use< i f° r ''■gnashing 1 — the 
 teeth — ) an utterance through the teeth. [Also called, of old, 'Soever' 
 (from '■Qgf to break)~\. So (3) 'Khoulem' (from Q7PI in the sense to be 
 'whole,' '■complete]) utterance filling the 'whole' mouth, and therefore 
 called of old £"]£) K?fo mouthful. So (4) ' Pathakh' (from flfiS to open) 
 utterance from the back of the open mouth. And so (5) ' Kibbuts' (from 
 Y*2p to collect, gather together) an utterance for which, as in the case of 
 ' Shurik' (1), the lips are drawn together, somewhat. (6) ' Segol' is sup- 
 
APPENDIX A. § 6-t. 39 
 
 posed to refer to the figure of a 'bunch of grapes' in which the three 
 dots are arranged. So (7) ' Kauniets-Khautuph' may perhaps (see above 
 § 12, Note *) refer to the form. 
 
 There seems to be some confusion in regard to the signification of (S) Ytip 
 
 — as to its meaning, and as to the value of the vowel designated by it. We 
 must try to clear this up a little, if we may. 
 
 In Masora 
 (1), "r", d (au), was called ' Great Kanmets;' and (2), — , 6 (fi), 'Little Kaumets;' — 
 (3), "=", a, was called ' Great Pathakh;' and (4), -~r, e, ' Little Patha};)^' 
 
 It is seen that the names ' Great' and ' Little' ' Pathakh' (i.e. Opening) 
 correspond with the Great and Little channels of utterance for the vowels 
 in (3) and (4). Is this so, or not, in the case of (l)and (2)? The name 
 ' Little K.' in (2) does correspond with the Small channel for the utterance 
 of -r ; and the question which we will try to answer in this App. is 
 
 (a) Can the name ' Great K.' also correspond with a Great Channel- 
 utterance, for "v , in (1) 1 
 
 Analogy seems to shew that those who gave the name thought so : and 
 
 ()3) such would suit well the broad guttural sound of a stream of 
 utterance filling the throat and the mouth wide-open, — and issuing from 
 the cavern-like pit of the throat. 
 
 But there is an objection. 
 
 (y) The name 'Kaumets' is generally said to signify 'compression,' 
 'contraction,' 'shutting' of the mouth*. There is so much authority for 
 this, that it must be treated with respect. But 
 
 * Some suppose that Kaumets iu the sense of closing or contracting tltc 
 mouth had reference to the o sound given by some as the value of this long — . 
 Dr Ewald writes "}'Dp 6 (a) contraction [zusammenziehung] from the ecu trac- 
 tion of the mouth" for o, and states that the appellation Kaumets for [both] " <Z 
 and o" originates thus from tliosc wlio wrongly read a [as] o [" die beuennung 
 Qamess fur a und 6 stammt also von solchen, welche a unrichtig o laseu," 
 where the sign a stands for his a value of ~~~r, and Q for p (Cp. p. 3, note ||]. 
 Those who so " wrongly read" may perhaps be glad to find antiquity allowed fur 
 their so- faulty practice, for the name Kaumets is of some antiquity. One 
 modern Writer, who gives ' Compression ' as the meaning (and a as the value) of 
 Kaumets, states : — ■ 
 
 " It is certain, from a distinct statement of Ebn Ezra (Tsachoth, p. 2, b), that 
 " the scholars of Tiberias and the African granunarians sounded it o." [Kalisch, 
 Pt. ii. p. 67, 3 (a)]. 
 
 Aben Ezra's statement so referred to is : — "but 
 
 ,^-un yopn xnp 1 ? a»jnv KpnsKi ansa *»an dj nnao »8MK 
 
 "the men of Tiberias also the wise-men* of Egypt and Afiuca know now 
 
 TO BEAD THE Gr.EAT KAUMETS." 
 
 This is not quite the same, surely, as - they sound it o\ 
 
 Dr K. proceeds to say, referring to this same passage, " It is equally certain 
 
40 APPENDIX A. § b4. 
 
 (a) Not only docs the name ' Kaumets ' admit of a sense corresponding * 
 more with what might be expected for it ; but, moreover, 
 
 (b) Such a word was current in the sense 'pit,' 'cavern,' or 'hole' in the 
 old Rabbinic diction. 
 
 As concisely as possible let this be shewn here. 
 
 (a) The name ' Kaumets' is from a root T*ftp which, along with a word 
 expressing 'fulness,' is used in the Bible for 'hand-fid', and for 'collecting 
 into a hand-fal.' The sense of 'compressing,' 'contracting' may perhaps 
 be deduced from this. Suppose such a sense to be admitted. Add that in 
 post-Biblical times the root was, with reference to the eye, used for shutting 
 the eye. Does it therefore certainly mean ' shutting or compressing the 
 mouth' 1 even when not used with direct reference to the mouth? Since 
 T'ttp docs not in itself involve the ' mouth,' this last is really introduced 
 by assumption in (j3). The mouth may, however, be said to be involved 
 here, because the reference is to a stream of vocal utterance. Exactly. The 
 reference is to this Stream. (Here the train of thought has changed the 
 line of its course). The compressing-channel of such a stream of utterance 
 need not be the shutj- or greatly-compressed mouth. It may be the widely- 
 opened mouth (so a ' Great-Kaumets') for one stream of utterance, and the 
 not-quite closed mouth (so a ' Little-Kaumets') for another; and thus, the 
 names in (1) correspond with the utterances if ' Kaumets' may be taken to 
 signify ' Compressing-channel.' But this agrees with the strict value of 
 T*/Dp- For, — a 'handful' being expressed by 'fulness of (or, that which 
 tills) a T*Dp>' — this Yfop stands for 'that in which the contents are,' and 
 
 the contents are compressed (it may be), within the including cavity? This 
 'cavity' may be large for large contents, and may be distended by the 
 contents which it is a means of compressing. The contents in our particular 
 case being 'a stream,' the word 'channel' may be used for the 'cavity' 
 containing it (or even compressing it, if any wish for this term). 
 
 But (b), — A term of this sort is sometimes given in accordance rather 
 with certain current notions than with strict derivation of meaning. It 
 may be interesting to notice that we find ' hole,' ' pit,' or ' cavity,' to be a 
 
 "that it was, in the middle ages, read in many districts as a, Comp. Ebn Ezra, I.e." 
 A. E. mentions that pronunciation (in the passage so referred to by Dr K.) in the 
 
 following terms : rtwn nioipon mix pip urns two ^ttj nnD3 runs u:»n 
 
 i. e. " it is not ' read as a' as we read it in these places." [Note, We have given 
 here Dr K.'s expression 'read ... as a' for the words 2 — 4 ; but, with regard to 
 his 'many districts' for A. E.'s 'these places,' it should be observed that A.E. 
 contrasts the pronunciation in the ' places' where he was, with that of the 'Men 
 of Tiberias, &c.' (Aben Ezra, or A. E., stands for tniy p'N i- e. miy p omziN 
 Abraham ben Ezra as he is called fully, in Rabbinic,— and, for shortness, y"n. — Some- 
 times he is called merely Ben Ezra, or— in Arabic form — Ebn Ezra, and Ibn Ezra, by some)]. 
 
 * Whether — be read broadly, or as a in far, the mouth is open— not closed. 
 
 t From shut, closed, compressed, mouth or lips — could o get out ? 
 
APPENDIX A. § 64. 41 
 
 value of Vf2'p current in Rabbinic Aramaean. The Arukh*, in giving this 
 value, cites f the Targum of 2 Sam. 17. 9 where a word corresponding to 
 Kaumets is given for the Bible-word meaning 'pits' So Buxtorf (Lex. 
 Rcibb. col. 2058), who cites also the 'great XXD^p' gi yen by the Targum 
 for 'great pit' in 2 Sam. 18. 17. This sense of 'pit' or 'hole,' into which 
 things were collected for storing purposes, is even claimed by some for the 
 Bible-word D^£jp£- Thus the Midrash of Breshith Rabba on this word 
 is [as given || in the Jalkut] — 
 
 xnvap *6*n Nnsopn 'nox pan wnrb KSDpe 
 
 A convenient means of shewing what we want to shew by this is offered in 
 the following from the y~\W [Appendix to the "P"iy (Arukh)], 
 
 : tto 'its Knsrap 'vn Dibs pen xbi '»mb 'p id pnv in jn v 'a in 
 
 " Breshith Rabba, c. 90, t/tus we read; — R. Johanan said 'From the Kaumets 
 " to mill, and they lacked not at all,' as much as to say that every day they icere 
 "taking out from the pit (or hole serving as store-place) for grinding, and the pit 
 "failed not; and ourR.'s say 'That in the Kaumets, and that not in t lie Kaumets,' 
 
 " as much as to say ' Not in the pit (or store-HOLE) alone was this blessing' As 
 
 "for the word Kaumets, its meaning is pits (or holes) " 
 
 This sense 'pit' or 'hole' is (we well know) supposed to come from yfy\^ 
 (Eccles. 10. 8). So the TH^, and Tiyft- But that does not matter at 
 all. Our point here is that the word Kaumets was so used in the sense 
 hole or pit, whencesoever obtained. This being so, the result is much the 
 same as that arrived at in (a): -and the question in (a) may therefore be an- 
 swered affirmatively thus far, viz. that the name ' Great U Kaumets' (whether 
 (a) as ' Great containing*"-channel, or (b) as ' Great Pit, Cavity, or Hole,' 
 may have-meant somewhat corresponding with the guttural utterance filling 
 the whole open-mouth as described above in (j3) ; and the fact of such a 
 name having been given is an evidence (so far as it goes) in favour of a 
 corresponding value having been given to the vowel 
 
 [Notes. Thus, too, — taking together (1) and (3), (2) and (4), at the commence- 
 
 * A Rabbinic-Aramaean Lexicon. 
 
 t N**Dip [}oi irn 'p o-pppp 'h. 
 
 X Gen. 41. 47, rendered by " handfuls" in our E. V. 
 
 || It is unnecessary to spend time and space on the reading of the Breshith 
 Rabba itself here in several editions. 
 
 § The true reading there (for rflip ")pip 'p pi in some editions) is 
 fPU 1P1P 1 31. Buxtorfs reference to (KXD13 and) KSDIJ involves that on 
 which this rests. Buxtorf gives a citation in favour of the sense ' closing the 
 lips ' for Kaumets. 
 
 H "We find also the epithet " Wide" used instead of " Great ;" thus in 73 Ps. 
 35. 10 the t~ is marked as 3m , i.e. wide or broad. [We are aware that 
 
 - T T 1 l 
 
 Dr Kalisch cites this as an instance in -which a Conjunctive accent ~ " produces 
 the same changes in the vowel as" Makkeph,— taking this to be 6 therefore.] 
 •* Or ' Compressing' if this be preferred. 
 
42 APPENDIX B. ACCENTS. § 65. 
 
 raent of this Appendix on (8), p. 32, — 
 
 (1) ' Great Channel, Cavity, or Hole,' and (3) ' Great Opening' (merely), for 
 
 T and — respectively, 
 
 (2) ' Little Channel, Cavity, or Hole' *, and (4) ' Little Opening' (merely), for 
 ~^~ and ~ respectively; 
 
 correspond with what was said of these four vowels in §§ 19 and 20. 
 
 And though we find later, in the "HfDn "1QD (ii. 80), the three —, '), and .<), 
 classed together as 'Great,' 'Intermediate,' and 'Little,' Aa«/«£fs'd[utterance], — it 
 does not follow that - -r~ was there taken as o. Nor does this follow (as some 
 seem to think) from Aben Ezra's saying, 
 
 (i) " Kaumets is compounded of Khoulem and Great Pathakhf"; 
 
 (ii) " It (i. e. Kaumets) is Kaumets'd from them, and the mouth is Kaumets'd 
 in the utterance of it." 
 
 Bather, — by naming, in (i), 'Great Pathakh' ('Great opening') as a com- 
 ponent part of ' Great Kaumets,' he so far declares the mouth to be well-open in 
 sounding it. He can hardly be supposed % then to give it an o-value requir- 
 ing the lips to be drawn together]. 
 
 APPENDIX B. 
 
 ACCENTS. 
 
 65. As the Student may wish to know the names of the Accents which 
 he may see attached to the words in the Hebrew Bible, it is advisable to 
 give a List of them. But, as it is decidedly unadvisable for the Beginner to 
 lose time in learning their forms and names at present, it is as well to 
 give them in an unattractive manner. The names are therefore given in 
 their Hebrew form with the several accents themselves attached thereto. 
 They are given here for purposes of reference, merely. 
 
 * The name 'Tsa-re' may mean a fissure from the sense " breaking," 
 " rending" (of iTlV), and so when used as an equivalent for the name ' Little 
 Kaumets' (see above) it might very well stand for ' fissure' — as a cleft or ' Little 
 Cavity' in contrast with the 'Great Cavity' of ' Great Kaumets.' [The sense of 
 ' narrowness' from the Biblical "V)¥ would quite as well give what would contrast 
 with the 'wide' in 2m J*Dp (p. 34, note II)]. But we do not object at all to take the 
 name 'Tsa-re,' as it is generally taken, in the sense of 'Breaking,' — whereby it is 
 recognized as being akin to Kherik for which an old name was "Qt^ ' Breaking ' 
 as mentioned before. 
 
 t " Therefore its form is like the form of them both," he adds, (meaning "=~ 
 an old form of — , consisting of -=- with a dot below it). — The passage here 
 cited from A. E. is the first part of that referred to on p. 33, note. 
 
 J To get at his meaning it is sometimes necessary to guess a sort of riddle. 
 In such cases it is dangerously easy to misinterpret him altogether by what 
 might seem to be a literal rendering of his words. 
 
APPENDIX B. ACCENTS. § 66. 
 
 43 
 
 The Accents are usually said to be 28 in number, — some of them Dis- 
 junctive, others Conjunctive. 
 
 66. 
 
 The Distinctive, or Disjunctive Accents, 18 in number, are 
 
 
 Form. 
 
 Name and Position. 
 
 Class. 
 
 Form. 
 
 Name and Position. 
 
 Class. 
 
 
 y»fp (7)1 
 
 III. 
 
 'T 
 
 A 
 
 i: 
 
 V 
 
 (piDS BjiD) : p-i^p an 
 runs (2) 1 
 
 I. 
 II. 
 
 (p'Ds; i n^?e> (s) 
 
 * Kgrs (9) 
 
 * KflfP (10) 
 
 "van (ii) 
 
 A 1 : v - 1 
 
 * i?ijD (3)1 
 
 (;'lOW eip'r (■*) 
 
 
 i- : 
 
 t TJV (12) 
 
 snso (6) 
 
 *.▼ 8 
 
 Form. 
 
 Name and Position. 
 
 Clan. 
 
 V 
 
 p 
 i 
 a 
 
 1- 
 
 ITS (13)1 
 
 IV. 
 
 J-PS '3"1D (14) 
 
 TT K X*- 
 
 :..(n^nf s*^n as) 
 
 DID or C^n$ (16) 
 
 Qȣhj (17) 
 
 | p^DS (18) 
 
 
 Theso Accents are arranged here in descending order of value as Stops. 
 
 [Note. In (1), — beneath 5 is the Sillak ; the : at the end is specially the 
 pIDQ PpD (°P- § 39 (!))• 
 
 In (8), the _!_ is Shalsheleth; the ( I ) is P'sik No. 18.— Shalsheleth [without 
 ( i ) P'sik, as in Ps. 3 . 3], is used as a Conjunetivo Accent : See below. 
 
 P'sik ( | ), No. 18, has a Disjunctive value but is not properly an ' Accent.' 1 ] 
 
 * These three, — viz. Nos. 3, 9, 10, — always stand over the last letter of the 
 word thereby accented, whether the Tone-syllable be the last or the last but one. 
 But when JL. (No. 10) is attached to a word of which the Tone-syllable is the last 
 but one, an additional _^_ is then placed over the consonant bearing the vowel of 
 the Tone-syllable. 
 
 t Always just before the first consonant of its word, but below the lino of con- 
 
 sonants. 
 
 Always over the first consonant of its word. 
 
44 
 
 APPENDIX B. ACCENTS. §§ G7 — 69. 
 
 67. The Conjunctive Accents, 8 in number (of one Class, all equai 
 to each other in conjunctive value), are 
 
 Form. 
 
 Name and Position. 
 
 Form. 
 
 Name and Position. 
 
 i 
 
 V 
 
 i (njBp) NB^n (s) 
 
 &0"1KIJ (6) 
 
 < 
 i 
 
 n>io C 1 ) 
 
 * tjsno (2) 
 
 t N»np (3) 
 
 Na-n (4) 
 
 fc^-lSS N31ND (7) 
 
 t : jjt ; 
 
 . .ioV p m* (s) 
 
 
 
 68. The Accentuation in the Books of The Psalms, Proverbs, and Job§, 
 is somewhat different from that of the other Books of the Bible. No Accents, 
 however, occur there of forms different from those given above. But some 
 of the forms given above occur in combination; — thus (1) _L, or — — f 
 
 or —II, is a great Disjunctive and Pause Accent; and we find also 
 
 (2) ■' j or _; '— very frequently, and so also (3) — (called Initial Tiphkhd) 
 
 placed beneath the line and just before the opening letter of its word. 
 These three are Disjunctive Accents. And we have, as Conjunctive Accents, 
 (4) °° , and (5) _~ , or - — ^_, and (6) — (i.e. above the word, instead of 
 below), and _*_ (without P'-slk). — 
 
 69. Several of the 26 Accents are known by other names, besides those 
 given above. The Reader need not be troubled with them here. 
 
 * Of the same form as No. 12, of Class III. above ; but this ~ (Mahpakh) 
 stands to the left of the accented vowel. 
 
 t This -A. is exactly like J_, No. 10 of the Disjunctives. But the Disjunc- 
 tive _A_, No. 10, stands over the last letter of its word, and the Conjunctive _1_, 
 No. 3, over the opening letter of the Tone-Syllable. This No. 3 is also called 
 &6t8. 
 
 I Always over the last letter of its word. 
 
 § These three Books are called "the Books of DON" (a word which signifies 
 truth). They are so called because the letters of this word DDX are the initial 
 letters of the Hebrew names of these Books viz. N of n'VN "Job," of ^D 
 "Proverbs," and n of DVPHP) "Psalms." flDX serves therefore- as a,- convenient 
 mnemonic form. 
 
 || The two parts may be on Wthe same syllable, or on < 2 > different syllables of 
 thesame word or (3) of different words. Cp. <*> Ps. 14. 4 &c. , <=» Ps. 1. 2 &c, < 3 > Ps. 1. 3 
 &c. Dr Kalisch gives also the form — ^ , but this is at least doubtful; it is certainly 
 not a great Disjunctive like (1); and it may be doubted whether it is really a 
 double accent at all. Dr K. cites Ps. 68. 21 for a disjunctive value, where there 
 
APPENDIX C. EUPHONIC DAGESH. § 70. 45 
 
 APPENDIX C. 
 
 EUPHONIC DAGESH. 
 
 70. There is a use of Dagesh, called Euphonic, 
 
 (1) at the beginning of a word in letters besides those for D. Lene (§ 47), 
 as in the 7} of *$vn£ 1 K- 17. 18, ^Tt^il Is - 49 - 20 > *? fflsfe I s - L Hi 
 to^J^S Is. 26. 12; 
 
 (2) in the midst of a word, where it is not wanted grammatically (a& 
 in the ¥ of WSyil Ex - 2 - 3 > and of THX) Prov ' 4 - 13 in some copies). 
 
 [Note. The Euphonic D. of (1) in a letter of 7133*133 produce3 some 
 apparent (not real) exceptions to § 48. Thus the dot in the 3 of '3~*1713yi Gen. 
 30. 33, 13 7T3*1 Ex. 17. 5, »T3TH3 Pr. 31, 2, and in the S of naTl^y Gen. 1. 
 12, |*713 ^y Gen. 38. 29, &c. &c, is in each case a Euphonic D., and not merely 
 a Dagesh-lene. 
 
 There are some few real exceptions to § 48 ; as, for instance, in ny"]D3 "T133N1 
 Ex. 14. 4 and 17, t*>'»:n33 t6n Is. 10. 9*.] 
 
 is a P'sik however. In Ps. 84. 4, the 3 without D. L. of 7V3 seems to point to 
 a Conjunctive accent before the 3 ; and in Ps. 50. 3, 55. 20, the sense seems to 
 require a Conjunctive accent where we find j<, 7<. Some copies seem to have 
 given D. L. after r? in Ps. 65. 9. From this passage, and 65. 6, some might think 
 ^ to be one of these Accents. — While one of two together is the Accent, 
 the other often serves as subsidianj before or after it. The t~ under the Tone- 
 syllable seems to have been regarded as Conjunctive in Ps. 76. 8, according to 
 some copies; but it is often a Disjunctive, as ordinarily. We find (a) both above 
 
 and below the same syllable as in Job 21. 28, 71133*^*3, according to some. 
 
 * These instances come under a Eule of Euphony mentioned by K. D. 
 Kimkhi, viz. that When there are together at the beginning of a word 33, or 33 
 or S3 or S3, and the first of the two has Shva, then that first letter has its 
 Dagesh although after a Long Vowel (or Quiescent letter) at the end of a word 
 which is read closely along with the word beginning as described. Cp. also tho 
 3 Lev. 25. 53 (after -13 Tf ), the 3 1 Kings 18. 44 (after 71 I?),— and so Ex. 14. 18, 
 Jer. 3. 25, where the D. is omitted in many Editions. — R. D. K. mentions some 
 exceptions and ancient variations ; and the Rule, as he gives it, is stated rather 
 too generally. The absence of the dot is, of course, in accordance with § 48. 
 
46 APPENDIX C. EUPHONIC DAGESH. § 71. 
 
 71. The dot of both* D. lene and D. forte may be said to have a hardening 
 and strengthening value, — in the case of D. lene, indeed, only to so slight a 
 degree as to mark 6 instead of v and p instead of ph, &c, — but in the case of 
 D. forte to such a degree that the letter in which it stands may be considered as 
 doubled. This strong dot (Dagesh forte) is employed for otherf than mere 
 pronunciation-purposes. But, for pronunciatio?i-pnriposes, a dot is sometimes 
 employed — with a higher value than that of Dagesh lene — to mark a rolling enun- 
 ciation caused by a delayed and prolonged movement of the organs while in the 
 act of pronouncing the letter in which this Dagesh + stands. 
 
 [Note (a) When beneath this Dagesh there is a Shva, this Shva 
 
 (1) is always Moving, and 
 
 (2) adopts, sometimes, a Compound form marking an approach to vowel- 
 sound by help of which the rolling pronunciation can be more fully given. 
 
 (b) As might be expected — from this D. marking so fine a process, and only 
 for the sake of Euphony, — the usage || ought not to be limited too precisely. - ] 
 
 * We are aware that we have against us the authority of Dr Kalisch, who 
 says (Pt. ii. p. 61), "It must be regarded as a defect in the system of the 
 "Hebrew points, that the same sign was chosen both for dagesh lene and dagesh 
 " forte ; for the functions of both are essentially different." Perhaps we may 
 think that this sentence of condemnation needs revision. 
 
 t As will be seen hereafter. 
 
 X If any name, other than 'Euphonic Dagesh,' be wanted for this, — one 
 might perhaps offer ' Dagesh medium* or 'Intermediate Dagesh,' 1 as not inappro- 
 priate. We are glad to say that we agree with Dr Ewald in disapproving of the 
 name 'Dagesh neutrum' (as it has been called by some, after J. D. Michaelis; 
 see Gesenius Lehrgeb. p. 88, and cp. Ewald Lehrb. p. 128, note 2). The name 
 ' Dagesh forte Euphonicum' which some give (a mistake perhaps for 'Dagesh 
 Euphonicum" 1 ) is bad, — since this dot represents less than D. forte. — Also, the 
 name 'Dagesh Conjunctivum* which some give for this D. in the cases of (1), is 
 not good since the Dagesh has no Conjunctive value. The closeness of connec- 
 tion is marked either by a Conjunctive Accent or by Makkeph. Nor can we 
 approve of the name 'Dagesh dirimens' 1 for the D. in some of the cases of (2). 
 For, so far as it is applicable to Dagesh at all, it would be perhaps more suita- 
 ble to Dagesh-forte than to a Dagesh of this intermediate sort. The employment 
 of this (quite modern) name, by some, is merely one of the passing fashions of 
 the day. 
 
 || A detailed statement of the matter which we have ready would tire the 
 Eeader too much if given here. The further treatment of this must therefore 
 be deferred at present. Enough has been said here for relieving the Student 
 of doubt or difficulty at his meeting with any instances. 
 
APPENDIX D. COMPOUND SHVA. § 72. 47 
 
 APPENDIX D. 
 COMFOUND SHYA. 
 
 72. As was said, in § 24 Obs., -=r and ~rr are founa sometimes under 
 other letters than Wlili^- I Q some cases this is for Declension and 
 Conjugation reasons, — as will be seen by and by. Thei'e are other cases, in 
 which a compound Shva occurs uuder non-gutturals, which may be noticed 
 here. 
 
 In dealing with this matter it may be well to bear in mind that : — 
 
 The hiatus between the first and second of two consonants (combined — 
 with a vowel to the second one) is the more perceived if there is 
 
 (1) any difficulty arising from the nature of the consonants, 
 
 (2) some change in direction of movement while combining them, 
 
 (3) a vowel-utterance affecting the process. 
 [N.B. (3) sometimes gives rise to (2).] 
 
 In such cases a Compound Shva often helps distinctness* of enunciation, 
 being a means of bringing out more fully the first of the two consonants. 
 
 (a) The chief cases of ( 1 ) were mentioned in §§ 22 — 24, [viz. cases in 
 which one of VnilX (without a vowel) is combined with a letter after it.] 
 
 (/3) Among other cases arising from (1) are some in which the two 
 consonants are the same, and the distinct enunciation of the first one is 
 aided by approximation to vowel-utterance; 
 
 * Moreover, 
 
 ('i) Since Metheg does so too (§ 43), one is not surprised to find "T with a 
 vowel preceding a Compound Shva. 
 
 (b) Any aid to distinctness is additionally useful in the case of a word fol- 
 lowed by Makkeph (and so— having no Tone-accent of its own — marked to be 
 hurried on upon the word after it). 
 
 (c) For Compound Shva under Euphonic D, see § 71 (Note a). 
 
 (d) As an aid to smoothness of pronunciation, a Shva which by Eule -would 
 be Quiescent is sometimes made Moving and marked as such by a Compound 
 form. Sometimes the Compound form of Shva is given besides the Euphonic 
 
 (e) Where help is given, sometimes, by dropping a Dagesh forte from a 
 letter bearing Shva (and so relieving the pronunciation by the removal of the 
 understood letter, which was implied by the D. F.), there further help is some- 
 times given by a Compound form of the Shva. [But not always, observe. Thus, 
 there is •1??rP1 in Gen. xii. 15, but the same word sometimes occurs with ?.] 
 
48 APPENDIX D. COMPOUND SHVA. § 73. 
 
 Thus 3' 1 ' before 3 in Nu. 10. 36, 3® before 1 Deut. 21. 2 (in some good 
 Editions), and so ^ 3 » Gen. 29. 3 and 8,'OM Ez. 35. 9, ;. (6) Gen. 9. 14, J*) Gen. 
 27. 29, and W 49. 23', Cp. Ex. 1. 14, &c. 
 
 (y) There are cases in which (2) and (3) occur, (and in some concur) ; 
 
 Such as 3< 8 > Zech. 4. 12 (according to some), 3 (9) Gen. 27. 38, T™ Gen. 2. 
 12, t?< u > Job 33. 25, 3 (12 > Gen. 3. 17, k™ Ju. 16. 16, y. (M) Gen. 21. 6, g< 15 > Gen. 
 30. 38, |3<M> Gen. 2. 23,' n< 17 > Gen. 12. 3, t?' 18 > Ju. 5. 12, tym Lev. 25. 34, n' 20 ' Ez. 
 26. 21, &c. &c. Such as the D™ in 1 Kings 13. 7, §J<») Is. 31. 5, V™ Jer# 2 2. 
 20, come under the head of "Declension and Conjugation reasons" (referred to 
 in § 24 Obs.) rather than here. 
 
 Now there is this grand difference between the cases (a) and all 
 others that, — whereas in (a) the Moving Shva always takes a Compound 
 form, in these others the occurrence of Compound form not only 
 
 First, depends often on some stream of ^ow^-utterance, in connection 
 with which the combined letters are pronounced, or b.f which they are 
 immediately preceded or followed ; but also 
 
 Secondly, is not at all regular; — there beLig sometimes — , and 
 sometimes a Compound form, not only in similar words but even in the 
 same word. 
 
 There is abundant evidence of this irregularity in the occurrence of 
 Compound Shva under other than Vl"!!"!^- This irregularity has importance 
 as shewing that we are not entitled to lay down strict rules for the 
 occurrence. And it has a greater importance : — viz. 
 
 73. The great regularity in the one set of cases (a) contrasts so strongly 
 with this irregularity in the others, that we may well be led to think that 
 there must be some essential difference between the two sets. Now, 
 according to the general principles on which the whole matter has here 
 been treated, there is such an essential difference. From the detailed 
 statement (1) — (3), (a) — (y), one may readily perceive that the difficulty 
 involved in the cases (a) (see § 22), — the difficulty of bringing out in 
 pronunciation a consonant which, besides having no vowel of its own, is a 
 difficult consonant to be pronounced — does not exist where the consonant 
 (without a vowel) is not one of those difficult ones. Consequently the 
 strongly-perceived hiatus of the one set of cases is not necessarily involved 
 in the others ; and the mark for strongly-perceived hiatus we might there- 
 fore expect to find not regularly given, although it is used here-and-there to 
 help out and give more fulness to the flow of utterance. 
 
 [Note. Different arrangements of the cases are given by Dr Gesenius 
 (Lehrgeb. p. 76 — 78), and Dr Ewald (Lehrb. p. 95, 96). The former gives a list 
 of not -well grouped occurrences, — from which (he says, p. 76,) "one may see 
 that* the cases of ■=■■ under non- gutturals are analogous to those of the simple 
 Moving Shva:" — but, since a Compound Shva is always Moving, the remark 
 does not help one much. Dr E.'s arrangement looks better, but it will not bear 
 examination.] 
 
 * ...dass die Falle des ■=•" unter Nicht-Gutturalen denen des einfachen Schwa 
 mobile analog sind. 
 
APPENDIX E. KTHIV AND KKI. § 74. 49 
 
 APPENDIX E. 
 
 KTHIV AND KRI. 
 
 74. It was given as a principle (§ 3) that every full consonant always 
 has either a vowel or a Shva shewing that it has no vowel. There are in 
 the Bible some apparent exceptions to this, which are not exceptions 
 really. Thus 
 
 (1) the name ^fttyty (Issachar) has the letter ffl without any mark 
 
 whatever attached to it. This £J> may be said to have place in the written 
 form of the name (testifying to the origin of it) but no place in the 
 pronunciation ; and therefore no one of the marks for pronunciation is 
 attached to it, and the word is read as if the unmarked ty were absent. 
 
 (2) In several instances a letter which appears in the written text is 
 called superfluous and is not recognized as part of the read text. Now the 
 vowel-point system has reference only to the read text, and any letter not 
 regarded as part thereof is unrecognized by vocalisation ; and the word is 
 therefore marked to be read without that letter altogether — as if the letter 
 were not there at all. — Thus the |"| in the word J1"V¥ (Gen. 27. 3) stands 
 without a vowel or Shva, because it is unrecognized in the word as read 
 (which is merely *"[*¥)• ^ u u ^ the common editions of the Hebrew Bible a 
 mark is always given to such a letter (as to the |"| in this instance) directing 
 attention to a marginal note which declares that letter to be superfluous ; 
 and the Student therefore need not anticipate any trouble in regard to such 
 appearances. [Under this head should be classed D^VVnD m 1 Chron. 
 15. 24 and three other places, in all four of which there is a note telling 
 that the ¥ is superfluous.] 
 
 (3) In several instances the written text, which is called ^J13, differs 
 (in a greater or less degree) from the read text, which is called **Tj5*. In 
 
 all such instances the vowel-marks that are given correspond with and 
 belong to the letters of the read text (the Kri). These letters are always 
 given (in the ordinary editions of the Hebrew Bible) in a marginal note, to 
 which attention is directed by means of a mark (generally a small circle, 
 thus -2.) over the word in the written text ^the Kthiv). Thus in Gen. 24. 33 
 there appears E£^** , l, the -1 directing attention to the marginal note 
 C**lp D£? VI] which signifies that the dots and the - and — belong to the 
 letters Q£>V1> and that the word to be ' read 1 is Q^VV Similarly in Gen. 
 
 39. 20 there appears ^DX? where the marginal note gives the letters 
 
 * We may employ Kthiv to represent 3^03, and Kri to represent "Hp, — the 
 value of i being ee, like the t in machine. 
 
50 APPENDIX E. KTHIV AND KRI. §§ 75 — 79. 
 
 ^DX*) an( l the word ia ' read' *^DX. So in the case of a corresponding 
 word in v. 22; and so in the word irVHXp (Ex. 37. S, 39. 4) where the 
 marginal note, 'ft V]"Yl¥p> tells tuat tnc wor( l is 'read' VHi^pt- — 
 
 Thus, too, for X^H Gen. 8. 17, — in accordance with the marginal 
 note ('p NX*n)»— tbeword'roatf'iB fcttPft- So for ^KTl Ps. 5. 9,— in 
 accordance with the mai'ginal note there, — the word ' read' is ^iJ^Tl ; & c - 
 
 See also Josh. 6. v. 7, 9, 13, 15 ; 24. v. 3, 8 ; IS. 18. 1, &c; 2 S. 21. 9 where 
 there arc U) one case of (2) and (2) two cases of (3) ; &c. &c. 
 
 75. There arc some instances in which the vowel-marks that are given 
 belong to a set of letters quite different from those given in the Ktfup. 
 Thus (to take just one example) in the well known place 2 Kings 18. 27 
 there appears DrT*^^ (the last word but one in the verse) where the 
 
 vowels and the Shva havemo reference whatever to the letters QfpyfcS' but 
 only. to those given in the marginal note signifying the words 'read' to be 
 Driven ^j^D* This is a strong instance : — but, as in all instances 
 
 76. the vowel-marks belong to the 'Read' Text (and, wherever this 
 differs from the ' Written' Text, the vowels that are given do not belong 
 to the letters to which they are attached, but to those in the margin) 
 pi-actically, it may be said, the Student will never find himself in doubt or 
 difficulty by reason of this. 
 
 77. According to the Note ^p X/*) ^TO — *■ e - ' Written' and not 
 ' Read' — 2 Sam. 13. 33, the letters of the word Q5>$ there belong to the 
 ' Written' but not to the ' Read' Text.— And, 
 
 78. According to the Note 3TO J\?1 Hp — *• e - ' Read' and not 
 ' Written,'— preceded by ^ Judg. 20. 13, and 'by j^fi) 2 S. 8. 3; the 
 word ^)5 belongs to the 'Read' Text in the former place (where p. may be 
 seen in printed editions), and the word HIS) m the latter place (where f? : 
 may be seen), but not to the •' Written' Text in either case. 
 
 79. There are a few cases (of what some call " Kri perpetuum") in 
 which the consonants corresponding to the vowel-points are not given in the 
 margin. Thus, 
 
 (1) instead of D^Sfc^T (Jerusalem) there is frequently £&$)'!'* 
 without the *> which although not 'written' is 'read' as the consonant 
 bearing the — . So, the same *> (not ' written') is ' read' with the -f between 
 the 7 and the ft in nkSfcJTV- 
 
 * N.B. 'p is often given as an abbreviated form for "Hp. 
 f In the Bible an additional _°_ is placed to the 1 at the end of the word. 
 This _°. refers to the mute » of VTliXp. (§ 35). 
 
APPENDIX E. KTHIV AND KRI. §§ 79, 80. 51 
 
 (2) The Name J"|iiTj when thus pointed, is 'read' ^"IX ^ord. 
 Sometimes this latter word itself occurs immediately before or after the 
 word Jlin*- I Q this case the word CTl/X God is 'read' for nin\ an( i 
 the points of this word Q^H/X are then &i yen to the letters ni!"V> — thus 
 niPl* (Cp. Gen. 15. 2, Ps. 109."21). [If ^K were read for J-flpp then, 
 there would be ^"7X twice in succession, — once for nin*> an( i ° nce f° r 
 itself.] 
 
 (3) The word XIH, which occurs very frequently in the Pentateuch, 
 
 is ' read' always as J^J"] . 
 
 [N.B. As may be seen, the expression 'read' is employed above technically 
 for ' what is peonounced in beading aloud']. 
 
 80. We have taken care to state this whole matter of App. E. in such 
 a manner as to avoid entering upon a great controversy. Not one word has 
 been written therefore hereabout either (1) adopting the one or the other 
 (or neither) of Kthlv and Kri, or (2) any reason for the differences. What 
 we are here concerned with is — How to read what we see*. The writer of 
 this knows well that the Controversy alluded to is a matter of serious 
 difficulty. (The discussion of it would be out of place here). It is very 
 easily settled by some excellent persons who know very little of the exoteric 
 practices (and still less, if possible, of the esoteric principles) of those by 
 whom the outward form has been handed down. 
 
 * This we set before us to do here. It seemed unadvisablc to try to do 
 more than one thing at a time. Thereforo many interesting discussions of 
 kindred matters, and speculations respecting tho facts of the case, and how 
 they camo about, and the state of the case before the facts, and such like, have 
 been passed by. The Student will, it is thought, be ablo to enter into such 
 with greater advantage when familiar with the facts themselves. 
 
READING-LESSONS 
 
 CONSISTING OF 
 
 SOME LEADING GKAMMATICAL EOKMS. 
 
 [Note. There are of course many other Noux-forms, and 
 many other VERB-forms, besides the few which are mentioned 
 in the following pages. These are merely introductory to 
 the Exercise -book. 
 
 N.B. It must be borne in mind that some of the Verb-forms 
 are merely Paradigm-forms.] 
 
READING-LESSONS. PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 
 
 55 
 
 I. Personal Pronouns. 
 
 N.B. The forms of the Personal Pronouns given here are 
 the ordinary forms. There are also a few other forms. There 
 are also some Pause-forms [§ 41 above]. — These are all fully 
 given in the Exercise-book [p. 9, & Tab. I]. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 thou (m.) !"lfiK 
 thou (/.) AN 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 ye (m.) EHS 
 
 [Note. The following are not to be read as Peading- 
 Lessons. They are given as introductory to the next two 
 
 / 
 
 roe 
 
 
 MWN 
 
 he 
 
 tfin 
 
 she 
 
 N»n 
 
 they (m.) EH & 
 
 n»n 
 
 they (/.) 
 
 nm 
 
 PAGES. 
 
 my 
 
 our 
 
 Pronoun-Affixes attached to Nouns. 
 (i) For a Noun in the Singular. 
 
 «- 
 
 thy (m.) 
 thy (/.) 
 
 your (m.) 
 your (/.) 
 
 It 
 
 his 
 her 
 
 their (m.) 
 their (/.) 
 
 V 
 
 D 
 
 I- 
 
 (ii) For a Noun in the Plural (or Dual).* 
 
 my 
 
 our 
 
 W- 
 
 thy {m.) *J — 
 thy (/.) V- 
 yowr (m.) ED*— 
 
 her iT- 
 
 their if.) ftV 
 
 The above are the ordinary forms of these Affixes. There 
 are also a few other forms. There are also some Pause-forms 
 [§ 41 above]. These are all fully given in the Exercise-book.] 
 
 * The mark of the Plural Masculine is D\— , of the Plural Feminine ni — 
 or (n— ), and of the Dual DJ— . See more in the Exercise-book [pp. 30-33, etc.]. 
 
56 
 
 READING-LESSONS. NOUN (m.) W. AFFS. 
 
 II. (a) Declension of the Masculine Noun *V&5> a song with 
 Pronoun- Affixes. 
 
 Singular y& a song, 'in Construction'* *V$ a song of: — 
 
 iw 
 
 my song 
 
 ♦w 
 
 his song 
 her so?ig 
 
 our song 
 
 my songs 
 
 xsw 
 
 s-w 
 
 thy (m.) song *T^ 
 thy (/.) song fW 
 
 your (m.) song M*l t their (m.) song D"]^ 
 
 Plural DH^ songs, 'in Construction'* 1h V£? songs of: — 
 
 thy (m.) songs ^^V his songs VY^ 
 
 thy (/.) songs *=|!T^ /^r so^s '"} ,, '7 , ^ 
 
 yo^r (/.) s<?^s j^T^ their (f.) songs |fi*T^ 
 
 Note. The PAUSE-form [§ 41] of Sp'E* % (>.) so»# is i'TJW- 
 The PAUSE-form of IpT % (/.) so^« is J TJ0. 
 The PAUSE-form of ,h Vfe? my sow^s is J ^^. 
 
 (/3) The Student may also read (from right to left) and give 
 the meaning of the following Declension-forms of D'lD a horse 
 with Pronoun- Affixes. 
 
 our so?igs 
 
 WW 
 
 / • 
 
 
 »*D1D 
 / - 
 
 /••sfttD) f DID 
 
 /JWD)'QpiDJ 
 
 /jrrao) dto^id 
 
 D^ID 
 
 D^D 
 
 Note. The ' Construct' f form of DID (Sing.) is the same, 
 viz. DID, and that of D^D (Plur.) is ♦p ! lD. 
 
 * For this expression, ' in Construction,' the Abbreviation ' i.e.' will be employed. 
 The expression is used of a word which is in close Structural connection with xohat 
 folloivs. For further information on this matter we must be content to refer to the 
 Exercise-book [pp. 33-37]. 
 
 f The ' Construct' form of a word is the form which it has ' in Construction,' 
 see Note (*) above. 
 
 1 In Pause ^D-ID. 2 In Pause tTpD-ID. 3 In Pause PD-1D. 
 
 'I. - ''ir it 
 
READING-LESSONS. — NOUN (f.) IN Ht W. AFFS. 57 
 
 III. (a) Declension of the Feminine Noun mitt law with 
 Pronoun- Affixes . 
 
 N.B. The T\~ marking a Feminine Noun is an accented 
 termination [Exercise-book, § 40 (p. 31)]. 
 
 Singular mitt law, 'in Construction'* mitt law of. 
 
 thy Cm.) law ^T^ I his law irnitt 
 
 thy (/.) foro ^r™ I for /aw ttmitt 
 
 { your (m.) law D^rnitt their (m.) law un'TII'l 
 
 lyowr (/.) law Rl^A their (/.) /aw Jjiifl 
 
 Plural TVnitt &mw, 'i.e.'* the same (viz. ttHitt laws of). , 
 
 thy (tt2.) laws f'T™ hi* laws Vtthitt 
 
 % (/.) laws ^'tthitt | /^ r i am irnhiri 
 
 your(m.) /awsEpVYnitt 
 
 . i 
 our law ^rH^i 
 
 Plural ttHiJ 
 
 I 
 
 my laws "TVmtti 
 
 ^WawsWtthitt 
 
 yo^r (/.) /aws RTlYTiM 
 
 ^^>(?72.)/a72;sCttnitt 
 
 or DiTrHfi 
 
 M«'r (/.) /a7^ ]tti"li tt 
 
 or iD'ttinitt 
 
 Note. The PAUSE-form of Tjmitt thy (m.) feu is ♦ ^ITYlfl- 
 
 The PAUSE-form of ^ttnitt % (/) km is : TrOfi- 
 The PAUSE-form of VYHitt >»!/ laws is J TVHitt- 
 %* There may be — in place of the ) in these words. 
 (/?) The Student may also read (from right to left) and give 
 the meaning of the following forms of n*13 a kid : 
 
 ;nni jcTOTT?) lS Br» /nttHi) ittH?j ^ 
 
 .wni ,(|??-1!) D ?0H^ /KT9) a KT! l J ' T ' : 
 
 •awna /jynnj) taynna rctnTi^rDjrnhjij 
 
 l<ar^)Larfinhi 
 
 Note. The 'Construct'! form of n*13 (Sing.) is fYHil; and 
 that of ITH* ( plu -) is tne sam e («*"*. tti*"I5). 
 
 * See Note (*) on the preceding page. t See Note (t) on the preceding page. 
 1 In Pause FMVJJ. 2 In Pause WUhj. 3 In Pause PrthJ. 
 
 1 iv t • : I • it ■ : it • : 
 
58 READING -LESSONS. VERB-FORMS (KAL). 
 
 IV. Conjugation of a Verb. 
 The First Voice [termed] 'Kal.'* 
 
 Infinitive. 
 to visit "tpS Inf. Absolute 
 
 {the] visiting [of] *lp3 Inf. Construct 
 
 in (or on) visiting "lp— •? \ 
 
 as (or at) visiting "to Infinitive 
 
 • • ' L > With prefixes 
 to visit, or for visiting y^P \ ** L -. s 
 
 jfom (or wzore £/*aw) visiting "Tp^P / 
 — &c, my visiting 1p|>,t ^ s visiting *lp&\ With Pron.-Affs. 
 
 [For the forms of the Infin. Kal with other Pron.-Affs., see 
 Exercise-book, Tab. XV (i).] 
 
 Past Tense, 
 ^e visited "TpS 3 s.m. 
 
 s/^ w'sz'ted *"Hp? 3 s.f. 
 
 £^0W (m.) visitedst V*Tpf 2 s.m. 
 
 ^ow (/.) visitedst fl"]p? 2 s .f. 
 
 ^ey (w. ory.) visited ^p? 3 pi. 
 ye (m.) visited u $ jp£ 2 pi. m. 
 
 ye (/.) ©mted PHP? 2 pi. f. 
 
 we visited :p? 1 pl« 
 
 [There are two other forms of Past-Tense Kal, see hereafter ; 
 see also Exercise-book, p. 81 & Note (f ) on Tab. XIV.] 
 
 There are two Participles in the Kal, (1) one of the form 
 hvk or SyiS, and (2) one of the form Sw3 or hv%. It will 
 
 .... ^ T \ T 
 
 be sufficient here to designate them as Participle (1) and Par- 
 ticiple (2), and to refer for a further account of them to § 139 (7) 
 of the Exercise-book [p. 83] (see § 117, p. 69, for S J? 3). 
 
 * For the Names of the Voices, see Exercise-book [pp. 69-72]. 
 f The — is u here. For — (and — ), in place of the — u here, see Exercise-book, 
 § 137 (4, iv) [pp. 80 & 81]. 
 
READING-LESSONS. VERB-FORMS (KAL). 59 
 
 Participle (1). 
 one (m.) visiting, or a visitor "Jp3* s.m. 
 one if.) visiting (l"Hp^ or) ""HptD* St f. 
 PL (m.) visiting (i.e. 1j35) DHpb* p l. m . 
 
 pi. (/.) w«*% niifjb* pl. f. 
 
 Participle (2). 
 one (m.) visited (i.e. "ftp3) "fij^f s.m. 
 one (f.) visited (i.c.rVTIp3) rTtlpSj- B .f. 
 P/. (?n.) visited (i.e. *?lp3) D*tlp3-f p l. m . 
 PL (/.) omferf niTlpS-j- p i. f. 
 
 [There are two other forms of Participle (1) Kal, see here- 
 after ; see also (8) on p. xvii of Tables in the Exercise-book.] 
 
 Imperative. 
 visit thou (m.) *^P? 2 s.m. 
 
 visit thou (/.) '"!p G 2 s.f. 
 
 visit ye (m.) i»j? » 2 pl. m. 
 
 mi* ye (/.) n HP? 2 pl. f. 
 
 Future. 
 ^0 will visit *"^P?? 3 s.m. 
 
 s/te wrctf otm* J*^? 3 s.f. 
 
 thou (m.) wilt visit %1pSF\ 2 s.m. 
 thou (/.) tot7< visit 'IpSri 2 s.f. 
 1 will visit X1 p^ 1 a. 
 
 *^<?y (tw.) w?7/ visit ^p^ 3 pl. m. 
 they (/.) wi# pin* ^"JpSFl 3 pl. f. 
 ye (w.) will visit ^p^H 2 pl. m. 
 ye (/.) trig t&ft njlpSft 2 pl. f. 
 
 we will visit *^p7^ 1 pl. 
 
 [For some 'Notes' on the Imper. & Fut. Kal, see next page.] 
 
 * Or, there may be 1 in place of the — here. 
 
 t Or, with — for "I [§ 14 above]; thus *7pQ (i.e. *lp3) s.m., etc. 
 
 X Or with \ in place of the — . 
 
60 READING-LESSONS. VERB-FORMS (KAL). 
 
 Note (i). We must be content here to refer to the Exercise- 
 book for Pause-forms [pp. 110-113]. 
 
 Note (ii). The Imper. 2 s.m. has sometimes T\ at the end, 
 as in rnj&fe? * preserve thou (m.) for 1fo$ and 
 PnpD sell thou (m.) for *DD • Comp. Exercise- 
 bookj § 141 ( 7 ) [p. 86]. 
 
 Note (iii). The Fut. 1 s. & 1 pi. sometimes have D at the 
 end, as in rni&EW / will keep or preserve 
 from Ift^tf , and so rTllb&SO we will keep or 
 preserve from ^\!2&^. Comp. Exercise-book, 
 § 144 [p. 88]. 
 
 Note (iv). (a) The Imperative & Future Kal given above 
 (p. 59) are said to be of the — (IDioulem)- 
 form, and Verbs which have that form of 
 Imperative & Future in the Kal are called 
 Verbs 'Fut. (-).' But 
 (/3) Some Verbs have — in the Imper. & Fut. 
 Kal where there is — on p. 59, and these 
 are called Verbs 'Fut. (— ).' See also Exer- 
 cise-book, § 132 [p. 75] and § 141 [p. 85]. 
 
 The Student may also read (from right to left) and give the 
 meaning of the following — from ^DD to write : — 
 
 ;rnn3 /ton?) W? / ri ? 1 ?^) && ) 
 .mr»| /PJ?wj) &p?n? ;on3 T j Past Tense * 
 /rtani) mto jnaja or nnn2) ana j Par ti- ( (i) 
 •<rtbv\3) D^n3 /rbvi) »ma j C i P i e ( (2) 
 
 .(HJ?h2l) WJT3 X'^JT?) 5H3 Imperative. 
 
 •afru /nOT) siajjopi pjnrpn) ^ny J Future Tense * 
 
 Forms, corresponding to those from *lp3 above, may be 
 written out by the Student from \7ti to reign. 
 
 * The — here is 8. 
 
READING-LESSONS. VERB-FORMS (KAL). 61 
 
 [It will be well to give at once the forms of the Imperative 
 and Future (Kal) of Verbs " Fut. (—),"* i.e. which have the 
 (— )-form of Imperative & Future Kal. Thus from D07 to 
 put on (as clothes) the forms are 
 
 Imperative. 
 put thou (m.) on ®4? 2 s.m. 
 
 put thou (/.) on *&?J? 2 s.f. 
 
 put ye (m.) on ^^? 2 pi. m. 
 
 put ye (/.) on •W?? 2 pi. f. 
 
 Future. 
 
 lie will put on W^f. 3 s.m. 
 
 she mil put on « ^ ?fl 3 s.f. 
 
 thou (m.) wilt put on &% 7T\ o s<nii 
 
 thou if.) wilt put on *#fpri o B> £ 
 
 / will put on ^??^ 1 a. 
 
 they (m.) will put on ^'t?* 3 pi. m. 
 
 they (/.) will put on ™t?V?n 3 pi. f. 
 
 ye (m.) will put on ^WZDT) 2 pi. in. 
 
 ye (/.) will put on <"^'^ = ^ 2 pi, f. 
 
 we will put on &??} 1 pi. 
 
 Note (i). The Impcr. 2 s.m. of this form also has sometimes 
 Jl at the end, as in i"D*lp approach thou (/«.) for 
 nnp, and TtytW hear thou (m.) for $£)&. Comp. 
 Exercise-book, § 141 (7) on p. 86, and (5) (a & /3) 
 on p. 331. 
 
 Note (ii). The Fut. 1 s. & 1 pi. of this form also sometimes 
 have n at the end, as in rQ^K / will lie down 
 for 35£^X, and so T\TX!2^^ ice will rejoice for 
 n^bO, Comp. Exercise-book, § 144, on p. 88.] 
 
 * See above, p. 60, Note iv (/8). 
 
62 READING-LESSONS. — VERB-FORMS. 
 
 The Second Voice [termed] Niph-al.* 
 
 Infinitive forms. 
 
 to be visited Op?? + ) Iffil Inf. Absolute. 
 
 [the] being visited [of] "Tp^ Inf. Construct. 
 
 in (or on) being visited ^p-H* \ 
 
 as (or at) being visited ^p-p^r 1 I 
 
 (_ > With prefixes 
 to be (or for being) visited 'p? . 7 L L >, s 
 
 from (or more than) being visited *"lps T\u J 
 
 — etc., my being visited ^Ip^, his being visited 1 'P*D 
 
 [For the forms of the Infin. Niph-al with other Pron.-Affs., 
 see Exercise-book, Tab. XV (ii).l 
 
 Past Tense. 
 he was visited *"fp^ 3 s.m. 
 
 she was visited '"Hp^ 3 s.f. 
 
 thou (m.) wast visited ^HPt^ ^ s,m * 
 
 thou if.) wast visited v'TPr'? ^ s 'f« 
 
 / w«s visited v*]p^ 1 8. 
 
 ^ey (wz. or/".) were visited ^p^ 3 pi. 
 ye (m.) were visited ^?7Pr ^ ^ pi* m - 
 
 ye (/.) were visited |v*7|- : • ^ P^ ^ 
 
 we were visited ^1p^ 1 pl« 
 
 Participle, 
 owe (wz.) ^>e^<7 visited ""^p^ s.m. 
 
 erae (y.) £e^2y visited \ ^jLL^ \ s.f. 
 
 , or rnjjM ) 
 
 iYw. (w.) £emy visited EHp£3 pi. m. 
 P/«. (/.) £emy cmterf ^j??? pi. f. 
 
 * For the Names of the Voices see Exercise-book [pp. 69-72]. 
 t For the form "IpDJ (beforb a Past-Tense) see Exercise-book, § 137 1 (c), 
 [p. 77] —and p. 338, 6 (a). 
 
READING-LESSONS. — VERB-FORMS (nIPH-Al). 
 
 63 
 
 be thou (m.) visited 
 be thou (y.) visited 
 be ye (m.) visited 
 be ye if.) visited 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 0"H T ) *W 2 s.m. 
 •TpBTI 2 B .f. 
 
 npen 2 P i. m . 
 (or j?) fifjpsn 2 pi. f. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Tp9! 3 s.m. 
 
 npsi? 3 s .f. 
 
 1J53F1 2 s.m. 
 
 npwg 2 s .f. 
 
 ^e w?7/ #6 visited 
 she will be visited 
 thou (m.) wilt be visited 
 thou {/.) wilt be visited 
 I shall be visited (F^—, Iffi* or) "lp3K l s . 
 they (m.) will be visited ^p^! 3 pi. m. 
 
 they (/.) will be visited (or p) njTjWl 3 pi. f. 
 ye (m.) will be visited ^p^ 2 pi. m. 
 
 ye (/.) will be visited (or p) ^J"]|?¥? 2 pi. f. 
 we shall be visited C^Ht) "'P?? 1 pi- 
 
 The Student may also read (from right to left) and give the 
 meaning of the following from 
 
 (i) DS&y in Kal to judge, Niph. to be judged, 
 (ii) &?5H in Kal to hold, Niph. to be held. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Hii) 
 
 / •• T V 
 
 /^snn) ^srin /^snri) paw 
 
 Forms corresponding to those from IDS may be written 
 out from 137 , in Niph. fo fo ta£e>i or caught. 
 
64 READING-LESSONS. VERB-FORMS (Pl-EL). 
 
 The Third Voice [termed] Pi-el* — [an Intensive Voice]. 
 
 From IDS (Pi-el) to visit diligently, the Pi-EL Infinitive 
 (Absolute and Construct) is 1p% the Past 3 s.m. is *lp£), the 
 Partic. s.m. is Ip&fc, Imper. 2 s.m. *"lp2, Put. 3 s.m. *7(5£\ 
 
 To vary the Reading- Lessons we will now take ^fc^, which 
 in the Pi-el Voice signifies to break {intensively), to shatter. 
 Infinitive Forms. 
 to shatter ^® l n f. Absolute. 
 
 [the] shattering [of] ""l?^ I n f, Construct. 
 
 in (or on) shattering ^^^ \ 
 
 as (or at) shattering ™S I *& with 
 
 7 • i.k,M.L ^prefixes 
 
 to shatter, or for shattering 131^7 I I 
 
 from (or more than) shattering *^^P / 
 — etc., my shattering ^^, /«'s shattering • >38/ [Tab. xv (iii)]. 
 
 Past Tense. 
 Ac shattered \(W or) T3t? 3 s .m. 
 
 sAe shattered <™^ 3 s.f. 
 
 jf/ww (m.) shatter edst 1?*]^ 2 s.m. 
 
 Mow (/.) shatter edst ^"^P 2 s.f. 
 
 I shattered WfilpJ 1 s. 
 
 Mey (w. or/.) shattered TlStfP 3 pi. 
 
 ye (»i.) shattered bftlSW 2 pi. m. 
 
 ye (/.) shattered P™^ 2 pi. f. 
 
 we shattered ^W 1 pi. 
 
 Participle. 
 ewe (w.) shattering *^5^P s.m. 
 
 ewe (/.) shattering (1™^? or) i"^^? s.f. 
 iV. (m.) shattering (i.e. *1^?) ^-1^& pi. m. 
 P/. (/.) shattering TftlS&h pi. f. 
 
 * For the Names of the Voices see Exercise-book [pp. 69-72]. 
 
 f The form 1|5>B (i.e. with the — ) is the usual oue for the Pi-el Past 3 s.m. 
 
READING-LESSONS. VERB-FORMS (Pl-EL). 
 
 65 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 shatter thou (m.) 
 shatter thou {/.) 
 shatter ye (m.) 
 shatter ye {/.) 
 
 (m_)n^ 2s .m. 
 
 T»? 2 s.f. 
 fi30 2 pi. m. 
 
 riarjto 2 P i. f. 
 
 Future. 
 Ae wi<7 shatter *&?. 3 s.m. 
 
 5/^ w^tf setter *fi#fi 3 s.f. 
 
 M0&5 (m.) wilt shatter ^?^fi 2 s.m. 
 
 </fow (/.) w*& s^a«er *)??fcl 2 s.f. 
 
 / wafl s/^ter (FTl- ) "fi^K 1 s. 
 
 i72<?y (m.) wzY/ shatter ^^) 3 pi. m. 
 
 2*% (/.) mill shatter HJ"]|TO 3 pi. f. 
 
 y<e (w.) 7t77/ shatter *\1%&Fl pi. m. 
 
 ye (/.) hhTJ shatter ^3*13^ 2 pi. f. 
 
 me mill shatter (^Tr) ^5^? 1 pi. 
 
 Note. The Student may also read (from right to left) and 
 give the meaning of the following from 
 
 (i) YfoX in Pi-el to strengthen ; 
 (ii) i)lty in Pi-el to set up on high. 
 
 ^m /toy®*) pwsn 
 /^fiwfi) paw? 
 
 
 (i) 
 
 (ii) 
 
 Forms corresponding to those from ^QE? above may be 
 written out from *l£7, in Pi-el to teach. 
 
 * Or, with — in place of the — here. 
 
66 READING-LESSONS. VERB-FORMS (PU-AL). 
 
 The Fourth Voice [termed] Pu-al* [Passive of Pi-Sl], 
 From "Tp3, (Pu-al) to be visited diligently, the Infinitive 
 Absolute is 1J53, Inf. Constr. IpD, Past 3 s.m. 1p& f 
 Partic. s.m. I&bti, Fut. 3 s.m. npfi\ 
 
 To vary the Peading-Lessons we will take now the Yerb ^33 
 (Kal) to steal, — which in the Pi-el signifies to steal and in 
 the Pu-al to be stolen (with an Intensity of meaning). 
 Infinitive forms. 
 to be stolen ^^ Inf. Absolute 
 
 the [being] stolen [of] ^5 l n f. Construct 
 
 in (or on) being stolen -^ : \ 
 
 as (or at) being stolen *i?r I 
 
 ssiC /With prefixes 
 to be stolen ox for being stolen J?" I H L », <. 
 
 y*row (or wore than) being stolen ^^P J 
 —etc., my being stolen ^ty, his being stolen 1^5 [Tab. XV (iv)]. 
 
 Past Tense. 
 he was stolen ^\\ 3 s.m. 
 
 she was stolen ^1*? 3 s.f. 
 
 thou (m.) wast stolen ^^*) 2 s.m. 
 
 thou (f) wast stolen ^^ 2 s.f. 
 
 / was stolen vrr^ 1 s. 
 
 £Aey (m. orf) were stolen ^3| 3 p], 
 
 ye (m.) were stolen uPQ!& 2 pi. m. 
 
 ye if) were stolen P^*?3 2 pi. f. 
 
 we were stolen ^~\ 1 pl« 
 
 Participle forms. 
 one On.) stolen ^^P s.m. 
 
 one (/.) sfo/ew ( n ?^? or) H^? s .f. 
 PI. (?n.) stolen ^**?H? P 1 - m - 
 
 PJ. (/.) «tofe« ™?^? pi. f. 
 
 * For the Names of the Voices see Exercise-book [pp. 69-72]. 
 
READING-LESSONS. VERB-FORMS (pu-Al). 67 
 
 There is no Imperative in this Voice (Pu-al). 
 
 Future. 
 
 he will be stolen ^^. 3 s.m. 
 
 she will be stolen 33Hn 3 s.f. 
 
 thou (m.) wilt be stolen ^/T 2 s ' m ' 
 
 thou (/.) wilt be stolen *^fi 2 s.f. 
 
 / shall be stolen ^-?? 1 s * 
 
 they (m.) will be stolen ^fl 3 pi. m. 
 
 *% (/.) will be stolen ™lttn 3 p i. f. 
 
 ye (m.) will be stolen ^^ 2 pi. m. 
 
 ye (/.) will be stolen ^J?^ o pi. f. 
 
 we shall be stolen ^33 1 pi. 
 
 The student may also read (from right to left) and give the 
 meaning of the following from (i) *"|fiD in Pu-al to be told, and 
 (ii) Hiy in Pu-al to be crooked (in which the 1 is Consonantal). 
 
 .-ij-isd ,(iFnsD) Dnnsp /lisp /rpsp ,(ljO§D) J!?")BD ,(nn?D) isp (i) 
 .n$a /(n^n-iyn) -iroyn ,(roJM$i) -in?iP n-iyx ,(*£$$) rwjjfl /(niv^) nj$ (ii) 
 
 [Note. 
 It is important to observe that there is Dagesh- Forte in all 
 the Pi-el and Pu-al forms given above [on pp. 64-67], — viz. 
 in the p of the forms from *1p5, 
 in the ^ of the forms from *D£? , 
 in the t2 of the forms from V£X , 
 in the 3 of the forms from *2y& , 
 in the 3 of the forms from 333 , 
 in the 3 of the forms from *13D, and 
 in the 1 of the forms from T\)V (j us ^ above). 
 N.B. This Dagesh F., in the second one of the three 
 Fundamental or 'Root' letters (as they are called) of each of 
 these Verbs, belongs to and is said to be 'Characteristic' of 
 these two Voices Pi-el and Pu-al.] 
 
68 READING-LESSONS. — VERB-FORMS (HIPH-IL). 
 
 The Fifth Voice [termed] Hiph-il* [a Causative Yoice]. 
 
 From IDS the Hipii-il Infin. Absolute is 1pSfl, Infin. 
 
 Constr. TpSH, Past 3 s.m. YMFl, Partic. (s.m.) TpSfi, 
 Imper. 2 s.m. ngSH, Fut. 3 s.m. Tptf (or Ij^J. 
 
 To vary the Reading-Lessons we will take now the Root \?W 
 which in the Hiph-il signifies to cast, or fling. 
 Infinitive forms.^ 
 to cast J?Vfo Inf - Absolute 
 
 [the] casting [of] Y ? ^H Inf. Construct 
 
 in (or era) casting "^ ?*f - : \ 
 
 / a ,• Tt^wrt'n V Inf- with 
 
 as (or at) casting =| 'VUV f 
 
 ^Lm«.L /Prefixes 
 to cast, or for casting =1 7^"J? \ ^ L >. ■. 
 
 /rem (or were £/j<2w) casting *sj V7 •?¥ ' 
 —etc., wy casfc'w^ W^T 1 , to cos£% lO^Pl [Tab. XV (v)]. 
 
 Past Tense. 
 /<e eas* T/^ 3 s.m. 
 
 s/;e cas* nyh&) 3 s.f. 
 
 tf/ww (w.) didst cast fti?WT) 2 s.m. 
 
 ^ew (/.) didst cast ^/^ 2 s.f. 
 
 least ™bVfa Is. 
 
 *Aey (m. or/.) ras£ to^Pl 3 pi. 
 
 ye (m.) cast &$??&? 2 pi. m. 
 
 ye (/.) cas* 157??^ 2 P 1 - f - 
 
 we cast ^??^ 1 pi. 
 
 Participle, 
 owe (m.) casting **J /7P s.m. 
 
 ewe (/.) easftwy ( n fc f?^ or) MJ r$? s.f. 
 
 i>/. (w.) 0«S!% (i.e. *3 Y?9) D 'P >( 7^ pi. m. 
 
 pi. (/.) ras^y nirwft pi. f. 
 
 * For the Names of the Voices see Exercise-book [pp. 69-72]. 
 
READING-LESSONS. — VERB-FORMS (HIPH-il/). 69 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 cast thou (m.) (fo*?&0 &) J>&\) 2 s.m. 
 
 cast thou (/.) WBVI 2 s.f. 
 
 cast ye (m.) 'Dv^H 2 pi. m. 
 
 cas* ye (/.) •"w^? 1 2 pi. f. 
 
 Future. 
 
 /^ will cast ($& &) yTf!. 3 s.m. 
 
 *&? frig ras* 0(?®ft &) 1^?p? 3 s.f. 
 
 *te (*».) witt ras* (^^ &) y?^? 2 s.m. 
 
 *ta (/.) wilt cast *?7?^ 2 s.f. 
 
 / will cast (fa^t &) T^ 5 1 8. 
 
 *% Gra.) ««'# cas£ W Y#! 3 pi. in. 
 
 they {/.) will cast ™7^ 3 pi. f. 
 
 ye (m.) will cast ID v£Tl 2 pi. m. 
 
 ye if.) will cast ™?^ 2 pi. f. 
 
 we will cast (H?^ &) f^ 1 pi. 
 
 The Student may also read and give the meaning of the 
 following from 73^ in IIiph-il to cause to be low, to lower. 
 
 :h$m jyEtmh }?E&rh ^stfna y %m 
 ,*fiWn ^nSa^ri) rhzm /piS^bti) 7 % stfn 
 
 4^3) L • L • L • L 
 
 * For the H at the end of the 2 s.m. Iraper., and of the 1 s. & 1 pi. Fut., see 
 Exercise-book [§ HI (7) for Imperative forms, and § 144 for Future forms]. 
 
70 READING-LESSONS. VERB-FORMS (hoPH-AL). 
 
 The Sixth Voice [termed] Hoph-al* (or Huph-al).* 
 
 N.B. The — is 6 under the first letter of the words below ; 
 thus from "Tp3 the Infin. Hoph-al is HpSPl (hoph-ked) and 
 "7p3Pl (kdph-kdd), the Past 3 s.m. is IpfiPI (I/oph-kdd), the 
 Partic. s.m. IpSft (mdph-kaud), the Put. 3 s.m. HpS* 1 (yoph-kdd). 
 The corresponding Huph-al forms are "TpfiPI or IpSH Infin., 
 T&SPl Past 3 s.m., TjjSfc Partic. s.m., *]&& Fut. 3 s.m. " But 
 
 The difference between the sister-vowels — 6 and — u is 
 so slight that both forms are included under the one name 
 Hoph-al [as said in the Exercise-book, p. 72]. 
 
 We will now take the Root fiPl&S' which in Hoph-al signifies 
 to be destroyed (or marred). The Student knows that a Shva- 
 Moving under Pi takes a Compound form [§ 24 above]. — This 
 Root may serve as a means of introducing the following im- 
 portant Pule [Comp. Exercise-book, § 183 (p. 121)]. 
 
 Pule. When in the process of word-forming a letter would 
 occur twice together with a Shva- Quiescent under the first 
 of the two, this with its — is dropped and Dagesh F. (im- 
 plying a letter with — Quiescent before it, § 53) is put in the 
 next letter ; as in *|3P0 for ^(3)P0 1 pi. Past Kal, fr. jj"0. 
 
 The Hoph-al Infinitive forms PlPl^Pl UPt^n^ etc., are so 
 very rare that we need not give them in full here. 
 
 Past Tense. 
 he was destroyed ^D^'7 3 s.m. 
 
 she was destroyed ^}V^^ 3 s.f. 
 
 thou (m.) wast destroyed [JjCWP^-] ^H^ 2 s.m. 
 thou (/.) wast destroyed [fi(fi)H#ri==] HPl^n 2 s.f. 
 I was destroyed [^(ri)Pl^Pl=] WtfTl 1 s . 
 
 they (m. ory.) were destroyed 'inilfepn 3 pi. 
 
 ye (m.) were destroyed [^(ty^M D ?^0 2 pi. m. 
 ye if.) were destroyed [|Jj(h)|T^n-=] PJfltfn 2 pi. f. 
 we were destroyed ^v - : 1 pl« 
 
 * For the Names of the Voices see Exercise-book [pp. 69-72]. 
 
READING-LESSONS. VERB-FORMS (hoPH-AL). 71 
 
 Participle. 
 one (m.) destroyed ^O^r s - m « 
 
 one (/.) destroyed *nnnSf>D s .f. 
 
 Pl. (m.) destroyed B^W? pi. m. 
 
 PL (/.) destroyed rilttj&ti p l. f. 
 
 There is no Imperative in this Yoice [but see Exercise-book, 
 p. 87, Note (*)]. 
 
 Future. 
 he will be destroyed ^D^ 3 s.m. 
 
 she will be destroyed nriBTjl 3 s .f. 
 
 thou (m.) wilt be destroyed HH^n 2 s.m. 
 thou (/.) wilt be destroyed W^fTl 2 s.f. 
 / shall be destroyed IV®*} 1 s . 
 
 they (m.) will be destroyed ^^\ 3 pl. m. 
 they (/.) will be destroyed IWftWfa 3 pl. f. 
 ye (m.) will be destroyed ifirwFI 2 pl. m. 
 ye (/.) will be destroyed ^H^ 2 pl. f. 
 we shall be destroyed ^DP^I 1 pl. 
 
 The Student may also read and give the meaning of the 
 following from *^$ which in Hoph-al signifies to be cast or 
 flung. 
 
 M?bvr\ (trpk'n) Dm^n G^J *5P?ift! (^H"vO?^^( n ?W ; ?)^ : 
 
 For PAUSE-forms we must be content to refer to the Exercise- 
 book, pp. 110-112. 
 
 t For J"innL' ; E the form would be JinnB'D (because of the II), and this is said to 
 be contracted into nnCJ>!9 — see Exercise-book [p. 3G9]. 
 
72 READING-LESSONS. VERB-FORMS (HITHPA-EL). 
 
 The Seventh Voice [termed] Hithpa-el* (a Reflexive Voice). 
 
 From *Tp3 (in Hithpa-el, to visit oneself) the Hithpa-el 
 Infin. is ISfinn Absol. & Constr., Past 3 s.m. *"Tp53nn, Par- 
 tic, s.m. 1p2np, Imper. 2 s.m. Tftfinn, Fut. 3 s.m. Tj-JSn*. 
 
 "We will take now the Root 113 (in Hithpa-el " to honour 
 oneself" as in Prov. xii. 9, — or " to make oneself many" as in 
 Nah. iii. 15). We may adopt the former here for convenience. 
 
 Infinitive forms. ■ 
 to honour oneself *T!33nn Abs.&Constr. 
 
 in (or on) honouring oneself *l33nfl2l \ 
 
 as (or at) honouring oneself ^r?-?^P^ / 
 
 to honour (or for honouring) oneself *$2jfTy) \ i 
 from (or more than) honouring oneself ' H^nno / 
 etc., My honouring myself i^T^, his honouring himself " «^-f?vP 
 [For Infin. Hithp. with other Pron.-Affs. see Tab. XV (vii).] 
 
 Past Tense. 
 
 he honoured himself "^rT^ 3 s.m. 
 
 she honoured herself PHipSnn 3 s.f. 
 
 thou (m.) honouredst thyself JTl2l3nPl 2 s.m. 
 
 thou (f) honouredst thyself JiH^^ 2 s.f. 
 
 / honoured myself v*]'?#?P 1 s. 
 
 Mey (?w. ory.) honoured themselves i133nn 3 pi. 
 
 ye (#0 honoured yourselves ufi^33nn 2 pi. m, 
 
 ye (y.) honoured yourselves jfi^33riP! 2 pi. f. 
 
 we honoured ourselves ^7- - : ■ ^ P-^ 
 
 Participle, 
 owe (m.) honouring himself ^?rO • s,m * 
 
 owe (y.) honouring herself (^"J^^P or) iT"l|LSi™ s.f. 
 
 P/. (m.) honouring themselves (i.e. "I^GlTp) DHlLSHp pi. m. 
 iV. (y.) honouring themselves rinSSTI Q pi. f. 
 
 * For the Names of the Voices see Exercise-book [pp. 69-72]. 
 
READING-LESSONS. VERB-FORMS (HITHPA-EL). 73 
 
 Imperative. 
 honour thou (m.) thyself H?3nn 2 s.m. 
 
 honour thou (/.) thyself '1?3nn 2 s.f. 
 honour ye (m.) yourselves ^^r^H 2 pi. m. 
 honour ye if.) yourselves FOT-aSJln 2 pi. f. 
 Future. 
 he will honour himself ^t^^T. 3 s.m. 
 
 she will honour herself ^T?rT^ 3 s.f. 
 
 thou (m.) wilt honour thyself ^?*vv 2 s.m. 
 
 Mom (/.) wid honour thyself H?^! 1 2 s - f - 
 
 7wi// honour myself C'TJt) "^rT^ 1 s. 
 
 they (m.) will honour themselves ^^STV 3 pi. m. 
 they (f.) will honour themselves ^fl^rT^ 3 pi. f. 
 ye (wO will honour yourselves ^--PJ"^ 2 pi. m. 
 ye {/.) will honour yourselves •"^Irl^nri 2 pi. f. 
 we will honour ourselves C^Tt) "WH^ 1 pi. 
 Note. There is often — in place of the — given to the 3 
 here, in the Past 3 s.m., and in the Imper. 2 s.m., and in the 
 Fut. 3 s.m. & f., 2 s.m., 1 s. & pi., and 3 & 2 pi. f. [See 
 Note (**) on this at the foot of p. xv(*) in the Tables.] 
 
 The Student may also read and give the meaning of the fol- 
 lowing from 233 in Hithpa-el to .steal oneself away. 
 
 ;nn^nn /raaanri) raaann /naaanri) aaann 
 
 .lasaann /j&iaanri) Droaann ^naann 
 
 . rfbaanp /*naan&> D^ana ^raaana & raaarto) aaanp 
 
 .(piaaaanri) toaann x^aann) ^aann 
 
 paana ,0*aanfi) ^aanri paann) aaan? 
 
 .naana /n&ainfi) toaana ^naaaanri) toaan* 
 
 For PAUSE-forms see Exercise-book [p. 112 (c), & Note (h) 
 on Tab. XIV]. 
 
74 NOTES : — ' ROOT '-LETTERS, ' ROOTS.' 
 
 Note (i). There may be PI at the end of the 2 s.m. Impera- 
 tive Hithpa-el, as in ^l^TH (for l^TH), stand thou (m.) 
 up, station thyself, which is 2 s.m. Imperative Hithp. with H , 
 from y&\ 
 
 Note (ii). There may be H at the end of the 1 s. & 1 pi. 
 Future Hithpa-el, as in PDXTltf (for i^TlN), I will station 
 myself, which is 1 s. Put. Hithp. with M , from ^¥* ; and 
 similarly Hl^Tli (for 1¥T0) would be 1 pi. Fut. Hithp. with 
 n, from i¥\ 
 
 Notes. 
 
 (tf) General Notes (a-e). 
 
 (a) It may be observed that all the Hebrew Verbs which have 
 been mentioned on pages 58-73 have, each one of them, three 
 fundamental or ' Hoot ' letters as they are called (p. 67). Thus 
 the £ and the p and the 1 of the Verb *lp5 to visit, are called 
 its 'Root' letters; and so the 3 and the T\ and the "2 are the 
 'Root '-letters of ^]"0 to write; and so the ^ & the ^ & the t? 
 of &JO/ to put on (as clothes) ; etc. 
 
 (/3) We may also mention here in passing that 
 
 (i) Most Hebrew Verbs have three such funda- 
 mental or 'Root '-letters; and that 
 (ii) The 'Root '-letters taken together, in the proper 
 order for each Verb, constitute what is called 
 the 'Root' of the Verb. Thus Hp5 is the 
 'Root' of the Verb to visit, on p. 58; and so 
 ^1"0 of the Verb to lorite, on p. 59 ; etc. 
 (7) On page 58 certain words (viz. IpB and *"P)p3, — p. 59) 
 were spoken of as being of the forms 7^3 and v)VB • And the 
 meaning was sufficiently plain there without any digression 
 being made for the purpose of explaining why the particular 
 letters 3 and tf and 7 were adopted as the special letters for 
 specifying forms. Reference was however made at once to a 
 
 * For this, jrO^nn in Job. xxxiii. 5, is the PAusE-form.— For the Pause- 
 vowel T comp. Exercise-book, § 166 (c) [p. 112]. 
 
'general representatives' of 'root '-letters. 75 
 
 place in the Exercise-book where information might be found 
 by any who should have the curiosity to inquire why those par- 
 ticular letters (7 ^ 3) were so employed. It was not necessary 
 to interfere there with the course of the matter in progress by 
 dwelling on that use of these special letters (7 V 5)- But it 
 may be well to take this opportunity for stating distinctly that 
 
 (a) It is a common and very convenient practice of Hebrew 
 writers to employ those three letters (7 V £) to represent the 
 three Root-letters of any Word, so that 2 and ^ and 7 may 
 be said to be used as convenient short expressions — Q for 
 'First Root-letter,' ^ for 'Second Root-letter/ and 7 for 
 ' Third Root-letter.' 
 
 (b) It is because /VB is the Hebrew word for what we call 
 'Verb' that the letters 3 and y and 7, being the ' Root '-letters 
 of 7^3, have been so adopted as General Representatives 
 of the ' Root '-letters of all Verbs, and of all Words, that have 
 Three Root-letters. And thus 
 
 The 1 st RooT-letter of any word* is called its '3/ — as cor- 
 responding to the 3 of 7^3, 
 
 The 2 d RooT-letter of the word* is called its '$?,' — as cor- 
 responding to the J? of 7yb, and 
 
 The 3 d RooT-letter of the word* is called its ' 7/ — as cor- 
 responding to the 7 of 7^3. 
 
 For example, of the word !"nft£'{< , in Note iii on p. GO above, 
 The &, being the 1 st Root-letter, is the 3, 
 The to, . . . the 2 d Root-letter, is the y, 
 The *!,... the 3 d Root-letter, is the 7 ; and so 
 Of the word ni¥TlN, in Note (ii) on p. 74, 
 
 The *, being the 1 st Root-letter, is the 3, 
 The ¥, . . . the 2 d Root-letter, is the V, 
 The n, . . . the 3 d Root-letter, is the 7. 
 (S) From this use of these letters 3 & ^ & 7, the Names of 
 the Voices — Niph-al, Pi-el, etc. are derived. [The First 
 
 * Any word, that is, which has tiikee Koot-letters. 
 
76 VOICE-NAMES. | 7tt£ FORM OF PAST (KAL). 
 
 Voice is called Kal (i.e. 7p light, not burdened) because this 
 Voice has no prefix belonging to it, and no Doubling Dagesh, 
 § 49 above.] The name of the Second Voice, Niph-al is the 
 word 7^53 which is seen to be the ' General form ' of *1D33 
 (3 s.m. of the Past Tense on p. 62), — having 3 & J? & /, the 
 General Representatives of Root-letters, in place of the 
 special Root-letters 3 & p & 1 of the Verb to visit. So the 
 name Pi-el is the word 703 which is the 'General form' of 
 *1j-)3, and of 73£^, the 3 s.m. of the Past-Tense on p. 64. And 
 so for the names of the other Voices. And 
 
 (e) The 3 s.m. of the Past-Tense in each Voice was specially- 
 chosen as that part, of which the ' General form' is taken as 
 the Name of the Voice, because the 3 s.m. Past of each Voice 
 has no letter, or letters, besides those which either belong to 
 the Root or are 'Characteristic' of the Voice. [A full ex- 
 planation of the Names of all the Voices may be found on 
 pp. 69-71 of the Exercise-book.] 
 (2) Some other forms of Past- Tense & Participle (Kal). 
 
 We may give here (A) the 7^3 & (B) the 7^3 forms of 
 (a) the Past-Tense Kal, and (j3) the Participle (1) Kal. — See 
 p. 58 for the 7^3 form of Past-Tense Kal, and p. 59 for the 
 7tf3 form of Participle (1) Kal. 
 
 (A) (a) The 7^3* form of Past-Tense (Kal). 
 From ^311 to be willing we have 
 
 he was willing X*r) 3 s.m. 
 
 she was willing ^V^C 3 s.f. 
 
 thou (m.) wast willing ^^} 2 s.m. 
 
 thou (y.) wast willing ^-fr^ 2 s.f. 
 
 I was willing v«?0 1 8. 
 
 they (m. ovf.) were willing Wan 3 pi. 
 
 ye (m.) were willing EPl¥s n 2 pi. m. 
 
 ye (/.) were willing I v ¥- 2 pi. f. 
 
 we were willing *^f - v 1 pi* 
 
 * See also Exercise-book, § 138 (A, ii) [p. 81]. 
 
7y2 forms (continued). 77 
 
 Note (i). These forms from T*3Pl are seen to be the same as 
 those from *Tp5 in the Past-Tense Kal on p. 58, with the sole 
 exception of the 3 s.m. viz. V*£PI he was willing in place of *lp3 he 
 visited. (For 
 
 (ii). The — under the Pi in the 2 pi. m. and 2 pi. /. is merely 
 the Compound form adopted by the Moving-Shva under the PI 
 here, in accordance with the Rule given in § 24 above). But 
 
 (iii). The Pause- form of H^SPI 3 s.f. is JPlVSPI, and that of 
 ^SP! 3 pi. is J ^SPl ; whereas the Pause-form of Pl1p2 3 s.f. is 
 tnipS, and that of HpS 3 pi. is JHp3. For the Rules, and 
 some more examples, see Exercise-book [p. 111]. 
 
 (/3) The hv%* form of the Participle (1) Kal. 
 From *1¥p to be short we have 
 one (m.) short (i.e. ^Vp) "^i? s.m. 
 
 one (/.) short (i.e. m_Vp) iTTXj? B .f. 
 
 PL (m.) short (i.e. T*j?) D*1£j? pi. m. 
 
 P/. (/.) short (i.e. rtlflfj?) nVttjp p l. f. 
 Note (i). The Construct form *")¥p above is really a 'borrowed' 
 form, but it is the most common one. The strictly proper form 
 is 7^fi, as in 7^X (or, when unaccented, — 7 IN) the Construct 
 form of 72X one (m.) mourning or a mourner (m.).f This, how- 
 ever, is a comparatively rare form, — except that 
 
 (ii). The 7^2 form with K for last letter retains the tf— as 
 in tf*V a fearer of, from N*V one (m.) fearing or a fearer (m.). 
 
 (iii). Some retain the — in the Constr. B.f. and PI. m. as in 
 
 HKftp Constr. form of PlX^tO s.f from NfttO one (m.) unclean, & 
 
 ^SH Construct form of D^SPi PI. m. from VfiPl one (m.) wilting. 
 
 (iv). For some more of these see the Exercise- book, pp. 327 
 
 &328. 
 
 (v). For 'Rules' respecting the Formation of Construct 
 forms, see Exercise-book, [p. 35]. 
 
 * See also Exercise-book, § 139 (5 iii) [p. 84], also (0 ii) & (e) [pp. 327 & 328]. 
 t As said also in the Exercise-book, Appendix (A) to Tab. IX (Notes i & ii). 
 
78 7^3 FORMS (CONTINUED). — 7^3 FORMS. 
 
 Note (vi). For the 'Slight'- vowel in 'Htfp above, compare the 
 explanation of the formation of **OT from DHl'l in the Exer- 
 cise-book, § 57 (7) [p. 37]. So for m_¥p from H^p see § 56 
 (i & v) [p. 35] of the Exercise-book, and compare the explana- 
 tion of the formation of HpW from *W4 in § 57 G 8 ) LP- 36 J- 
 (B) (a) The 7$3* form of Past-Tense Kal. 
 From 7^ to be able we have 
 
 he was able '^ T 3 s.m. 
 
 she was able ? = T 3 s.f. 
 
 thou (m.) wast able ^}(^ T % s - m> 
 
 thou (/.) n-ast able np\ 2 s.f. 
 
 / was able . 7*^ T 1 s. 
 
 they (m. or/.) were able ^!t\ 3 pi- 
 
 ye {m.) were able DFttDjt 2 pi. m. 
 
 ye (/.) were aife \^) f 2 pi. f. 
 
 we were a£/e ^7 t 1 pi* 
 
 Note (i). These forms from ^y are seen to have — in the 
 place of the — in the Past-Tense of *lp3 on p. 58, with the 
 exception of the 2 pi. m. and the 2 pi. f. in which the — is 
 replaced by — &• And 
 
 (ii). The — is so shortened into — 6 in these two forms end- 
 ing in Dft & jft because 
 
 (a) The accent of the word is always on the ending 
 
 Dft, & [ft, in the 2 pi. m. & 2 pi./., of all Past- 
 Tenses in all Voices of all Verbs ; — 
 
 (b) Therefore the syllable before the Dft, & jft, is 
 
 unaccented ; — 
 
 (c) Therefore if the — were not so shortened, there 
 
 would be an unaccented Long- Vowel before a 
 Shva which is known to be Quiescent because 
 it is followed by Dagesh L. in the ft [p. 31 (C, i)] : 
 
 * See also Exercise-book [§ 138 (A, iii), p. 81]. 
 t The — here is u, see Note (ii) in (a) just above. 
 
7^2 FORMS (CONTINUED). — VARIATIONS IN KAL FORMS. 79 
 
 (d) To avoid such a breach of the Great Rule (II) 
 on p. 26, the Long-Yowel — is shortened into 
 - 6 [p. 31 (D, ii)]. 
 
 (0) The Sy3* form of Participle (1) (Kal). 
 
 From ^y to be able, the forms are 
 
 one (m.) able (i.e. /^) ^ '3* s.m. 
 
 one (/.) able (i.e. Tub]) iTO| s .f. 
 
 P/. (m.) able (i.e. 7^)) & <S? pi. m. 
 
 pi (/.) a^d ri\b'y pi. f. 
 
 (J) Some slight Variations from forms on pages 58-73 
 
 BECAUSE OF ONE OF THE LETTERS "lyPin^ IN THE ROOT. 
 
 (I) Some Variations in ' KaV forms. 
 
 1. "When the first Root-letter is H or H or y. 
 The Kal forms arc such as — from T2]} to serve — 
 
 ,"ttV Infin. Constr. ,"OT Infin. Absol. 
 
 . ihvt; , issh , thai , ihyz infin. w. & h 3 a 
 
 . ( nn^) enny , ( rm'y & rrnft -uy a) j 
 
 Past. 
 
 Partic. forms. 
 
 .(Hra^rny /H}?)TK> Imperative. 
 
 In these forms above there is not much Variation from the 
 forms on pp. 58 & 59. There is no Variation when the first 
 
 * See also Exercise-book, § 139 (5 i) [p. 84]. 
 
 t The word b\li (used commonly as an Adjective "great") is really the Partic. (1) 
 Kal of this 7j?S form. So also in the case of some other words. The word 
 ?i*13 when in Constr., and followed by Malckeph (i.e. unaccented, § 37 above), becomes 
 "?"]|. Comp. Exercise-book, § 56 (i) and page 50 (Note ||). 
 
80 variations in kal forms (H or PI or y as 1 st Rt.-letter). 
 
 Root-letter Las a Vowel. And the Student knows that a 
 Moving- Shva always takes a Compound form under any one 
 of the four letters p Pi H K (§ 24 above). [The Infin.* forms 
 with the 7 5 3 prefixes, as above, consist of the form *T^y with 
 the prefix-letter bearing a 'Slight '-vowel — as in Ex. (6) on 
 p. 29 above. The prefix £ takes — here instead of the — 
 followed by Dagesh on p. 58, because no one of the five letters 
 l^nnN receives a Dagesh — and the Long- Vowel (in place 
 of the Short one) is said to 'compensate' for the omitted 
 Dagesh, of which more will be said soon]. But there are 
 greater Variations in the Future (Kal) forms, as we proceed 
 to show. 
 
 There are four classes of Future forms. 
 
 (a) Some Verbs have (— — ) and (— — ) as, — from "TJ^ 
 to stand, — 
 
 he will stand "^^! 3 s.m. 
 
 she will stand lUST} 3 s.f. 
 
 thou (m.) wilt stand "IfiS/fl 2 s.m. 
 
 thou (/.) wilt stand + H^ 2 s.f. 
 
 / will stand ( + nn^) lb§« 1 s . 
 
 they (m.) will stand ^IW] 3 pi. m . 
 
 they (/.) will stand ^Pp8^ 3 pi. f. 
 
 ye (m.) will stand tyioij/J-l 2 pi. m. 
 
 ye (/.) will stand niTOJl 2 pi. f. 
 
 we will stand ( + -"H^) TO 1 p l. 
 
 (b) Some Verbs have — in place of the — in (a) ; as, from 
 *)¥$ to shut up, restrain, — 
 
 * The forms "1TV2 & "lTlG (from "ITJ?) are rare. Some Verbs, especially with n as 
 first Root-letter, have the form 2¥n? (from n^ll). 
 
 f Here a ' Slight '-vowel (§ 56 above) replaces the Compound-Shva of the first 
 Root-letter, because the next letter has Shva-Moving, [p. 31 (B, ii)]. 
 
variations in kal FORMS (M or Pi or y as a Rt.-letter). 81 
 
 (c) Some Verbs have (— — ) in place of the (— —) in (a) ; 
 as, from U*$ fo fo su>g££, — 
 
 he will be sweet ^Ml 3 s.m. 
 
 she will be sweet *5&V 3 s.f. 
 
 ^o# (m.) wilt be sweet ^*^? 2 s.m. 
 
 *to (/.) finA be sweet % ?T?9 2 s.f. 
 
 7 s^atf or witt fo srcatf ( n ?^X) UtiJ 1 s. 
 they (m.) will be sweet ^1V» 3 pi. m. 
 
 M*y (/.) will be sweet ™T®% 3 pi. f. 
 
 ye (m.) will be sweet Qj^fl 2 pi. m. 
 
 ye (/.) *i// be sweet n ??1?! J ? 2 pi. f. 
 
 w<? shall or wz'# £e sweetf (""^V-?) -HHv 1 pl« 
 (r/) Some Verbs have — in place of the — in (c) ; as, from 
 1T\y to make prayer, — 
 
 jT?wj jcTSTO) Tito »osto) "W 
 
 2. Some Variations (in Kal forms) when the 2 d Root-letter 
 is one of the letters J? n H K. 
 
 The Kal forms are as on pp. 58 and 59 except that a Moving - 
 Shva under the 2 d Root-letter takes a Compound form. 
 
 3. Some Variations (in Kal forms) when the 3 d Root-letter 
 is one of the letters T\ Consonantal, or H or y. 
 
 The Kal forms are as on pp. 58 and 59, except that 
 (a) Either (i) there is Furtive Pathakh (§ 60) under the 
 3 d Root-letter when at the end after any Long-vowel other 
 than — , or (ii) a — is substituted for that Long- vowel, as in 
 VOW (once) for H?^ Infinitive Constr. Kal of Fl/W, and 
 ypH for yjTl Partic. Kal, s.m. fr. ftD,— 
 
 * The ' Slight'-vowel — here replaces the yr as in Note (t) p. 80. 
 
82 VARIATIONS IN KAL AND NIPH-AL FORMS. 
 
 (b) A Euphonic — is substituted for the — under the 3 d 
 Root-letter in 2 s/. Past, as in riPlpS (for ITlpb) 2 s./. Past 
 KALfr. npS- 
 
 (c) The s.f. Participle (1) ends in H — — instead of fi V — ; 
 thus, FMEfc? Partic. (1), Kal, s.f., from ^^—corresponding 
 to the form H*Tp3 on p. 59. 
 
 (II) Some Variations in ' Niph-aV forms, 
 (a) The special feature of the Niph-al Voice is the letter 3 
 put on before the first Root-letter. This 3 is called the ' Cha- 
 racteristic ' of the Voice ; and every Verb-form belonging to 
 this Voice on pages 62 & 63 
 
 either has this 3 standing before the first Root-letter 
 (as in the Past Tense and the Partic. forms on p. 62), 
 or has Dagesh F. in the first Root-letter — as in "IpGH 
 Infinitive Niph-al on p. 62 and so in the Im- 
 perative & Future forms on p. 63 — this Dagesh- 
 F. implying a letter for the 3 Characteristic of the 
 Voice, thus npSn for 1D^)T\ and !p& for lp^)\ 
 etc. But since 
 (/3) The five letters 1 ^ Pi H K do not receive Dagesh, as 
 said in § 49 above, therefore 
 
 (7) The Dagesh F., for the 3 'Characteristic' of the Voice, 
 cannot be put in the first Root-letter when the first Root- 
 letter is one of these five letters (1 y H H N) ; and what is 
 called ' Compensation ' for the omitted Dagesh is made by 
 lengthening the Short-vowel which would stand before it into 
 the corresponding Long-vowel. Thus from Dft*1 (in Kal to 
 trample, in Niph-al to be trampled) we have, for the Niph-al 
 Infinitive forms, 
 (corresponding to 'R^ri) D^lil Absol. & Constr. 
 in (or on) being trodden down ^rTf^ \ 
 
 as (or at) being trodden down ^Tl3 J With pre fi xes 
 
 to be {ovfor being) trodden down ^TTR I £, 7> 3> 3 
 from (or more than) being trodden do?vn E^Ho J 
 — etc., his being trodden down ^o*1J1 With Pron.-Affs. 
 
VARIATIONS IN NIPH-AL FORMS. 
 
 83 
 
 /•:-:■ 
 
 Past Tense (as on page 62). 
 0&Tb) IjDtfT? /HDpn?) Dpi: 
 
 Participle forms (as on page 62). 
 
 . (rtttyp) DW>a /naw & Harp) aria 
 
 [In these Past and Partic. forms there is seen to be no 
 Variation from the forms on page 62. But 
 
 N.B. There are Variations when the 1 st Root-letter is one 
 of the four JJ Jl H K > as will be seen in (S) (<y & b) on next page]. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 be thou (m.) trodden down 
 
 DfiTl 2 s . m . 
 WH 2 s.f. 
 IDftnn 2 pi. m. 
 
 (or ft naaann 2 pi. f. 
 
 be thou if.) trodden down 
 be ye (m.) trodden down 
 be ye if.) trodden down 
 
 Future. 
 
 he will be trodden down DpT 3 s.m. 
 
 she will be trodden down ^rTfi 3 s.f. 
 
 thou (m.) wilt be trodden down D/p*in 2 s .in. 
 
 thou if.) wilt be trodden down "P^p^ 2 s.f. 
 
 I shall or will be trodden down 0"^?— ) DftlX 1 s . 
 
 they (m.) will be trodden down ^£"V 3 p]. m . 
 
 ?% (/.) roitf fo trodden down (or ft HJDto'Vl 3 pi. f. 
 
 ye (?n.) will be trodden down ^D'ln 2 pi. m. 
 
 ye (f.) will be trodden down (or ft '"^DpIF) o pi. f. 
 
 we s/^// or w?// 60 trodden down (■""?— ) ^3*13 1 pi. 
 
 (8) As was remarked above, there are Variations in the 
 Past-Tense & Partic. Niph-al when the 1 st Root-letter is one 
 of the four ]) H PI X. Thus 
 
84 
 
 VARIATIONS IN NIPH-AL FORMS. 
 
 (a) From 3T^, in Niph-al to be forsaken, the forms are 
 Past Tense. 
 he was forsaken 
 she was forsaken 
 thou (m.) wast forsaken 
 thou (f) wast forsaken 
 I was forsaken 
 they (m. ovf.) were forsaken 
 ye (m.) were forsaken 
 ye (f.) were forsaken 
 we were forsaken 
 
 Participle forms. 
 one (m.) forsaken ^JvJ s.m. 
 
 one if) forsaken ( n ?$? or) 5"Qtttt s.f. 
 
 »$ 3 s.m. 
 
 •naiya 3 s.f. 
 
 ??39 2 s.m. 
 
 vqwj 1 s . 
 •ttiyj 3 pi. 
 
 DPQWJ 2 pi. m. 
 
 I9?ffj 2 p 1 - f- 
 u?SB 1 pi. 
 
 /Y. {m.) forsaken 
 PL if) forsaken 
 
 (i.e. **3JM) WJfj pi. m. 
 ™!£> pl. f. 
 
 (6) Some Verbs have — under the 1 st Root-letter, especially 
 when this is T\. Thus from 2$ PI, in Niph-al nfo fo reckoned, 
 
 
 Past Tense. 
 
 / • : - : v # v : : - ; v 7 t : - : v 
 
 .«a?Hj /tw^n?) tip®™ 
 
 Participle forms. 
 
 .nintfro /i.e. ^n?) *M0nj / + nn^m or roBTij) afro 
 
 (c) For a few forms with — to the 3 see Exercise-book 
 [Note (*) on p. 119]. 
 
 * A ' Slight '-vowel here replaces tt, under the 1 st Root-letter, because the next 
 letter has — (§ 56). 
 
 t Thus rni8j» s.f. Partic. Niph-al, fr. 11]}, Is. lix. 15. 
 
 X The form DHDHJ Ps. xix. 11 is like the PI. m. Partic. form in (a) above. 
 
VARIATIONS IN NIPH-AL FORMS. 85 
 
 (e) In the Imper. & Fut. the Characteristic 3 of the Niph-al 
 Voice is dropped and, the Dagesh F. for it being necessarily 
 omitted here, Compensation for the Dagesh is made when the 
 1 st Root-letter is one of the four ^ PI PI K as in the Imper. & Fut. 
 forms from Df21 on p. 83. 
 
 *** For PAUSE-forms we must be content to refer to the 
 Exercise-book, pp. 110 & 111. 
 
 (£) The Student may also read and give the meaning of the 
 following from 
 
 (1) tpV in Niph-al, to swoon, 
 
 (2) T*?n in Niph-al to be ready {for active employment), 
 
 lit. to be stripped (of encumbrances), 
 
 (3) "l^n in Niph-al to be turned, 
 
 (4) 7Dtf in Niph-al to be eaten. 
 
 (1) 
 
 ybrirh e wbm jSjt f whm #) 
 t^po ,«** ,T\^m Austin ,^sn* (3, 
 ^w tawxn Aan» t^am ban 1 (4) 
 
 (77) Some Variations in Niph-al forms caused by the 2 d Root- 
 letter being one of the four letters ^ Pi Pi X. 
 
 The Niph-al forms are as on pp. 62 and 63, except that 
 A MoviNG-Shva under the 2 d Root-letter takes a Com- 
 pound form. 
 
 * For this we have the contracted form Pjl3^2 in Lament, ii. 11. Comp. Exercise- 
 book, p. 79 Note (t). 
 
 t As this may be either 3 s./. or 2 s.m., the Student should give the English for 
 both of these. 
 
86 VARIATIONS IN NIPH. AND Pl-EL AND PU-AL FORMS. 
 
 (0) Some Variations caused by the 3 d Root-letter being one 
 of the three letters |"l consonantal, or H or $J. 
 
 The JNiph-al forms are as on pp. 62 and 63, except that 
 
 (a) Either (i) there is 'Furtive' (— ) under the 3 d Root-letter 
 when at the end after any Long- vowel other than — , or (ii) 
 a — is substituted for that Long- Vowel, as in PlpyPl Infini- 
 tive Constr. Niph-al fr. T\th (for HDm), etc. 
 
 (b) A Euphonic — is substituted for the — under the 3 d 
 Root-letter in 2 s./. Past, as in (3, b) on p. 82. 
 
 (c) The s./. Partic. ends in T\ ~ ~ instead of T\ — ~, as in 
 (3, c) on p. 82. 
 
 (Ill) Variations in 'Pi-el' and 'Pu-aV forms. 
 
 1. No Variations in Pi-el & Pu-al forms are caused by a 
 First Root-letter K or PI or fi or $?,* — except that the prefix fa 
 before the Infinitive takes — (as on p. 80) because the 1 st Root- 
 letter here cannot receive Dagesh [§ 49]. 
 
 2. Some important Variations are caused by a *1, and also by 
 one of the four letters ^ PI PI tf , as Second Root-letter. For 
 
 (a) All the Verb-forms on pages 68-71 are seen to have 
 Dagesh-Forte in their 2 d Root-letter. And this 
 Dagesh-F. in the Second Root-letter is 'Charac- 
 teristic' of the Pi-el and Pu-al Voices. But 
 
 (/3) Since the five letters *1 $? PI Pi K do not admit Dagesh, 
 therefore 
 
 (7) When the 2 d Root-letter is one of the 5 1 ^ Pi Pt N the Da- 
 
 gesh-F. for the Pi-el and Pu-al Voices cannot stand. 
 
 (8) ' Compensation' for the omitted Dagesh (by lengthening 
 
 a — into —, a — into — , a — into — ) is made when 
 the second Root-letter is *), — and sometimes when it 
 is one of the letters y Pi tf, but rarely when it is Pi ; — 
 See Exercise-book, Tab. XVI (2) & Appendix. 
 
 * Because, in PT-^l & Pu-al, the first Root-letter always has a Vowel, — and all 
 PREFix-letters have Shva, except the 12 before the Infinitive. 
 
VARIATIONS IN Pl-EL AND PU-AL FORMS. 87 
 
 (e) (i) It is unnecessary to give here all the forms in which 
 no Compensation is made, because they are the same as those 
 on pp. 64-67 except only that the Dagesh Forte is necessarily 
 omitted [§ 49] from the 2 d Root-letter here. Thus, from p$flf, 
 in Pi-el to cry out, the 3 &.m. Past Pi-el is pV^ he cried out, 
 and the 3 s.m. Fut. Pi-el is pV)£\ he mil cry out. 
 
 (ii) But a CoMPOUND-Shva is put under the 2 d Poot-letter 
 here whenever this is to have a Shva, and so we have the 
 
 Pi-el forms 
 etc. ,my crying out ^pV^ his crying out ^pV^ Inf.w.Pr.Affs. 
 ,they cried out ^V she cried out ^|?^V Past Tense. 
 t cry out ye (m.) ^p^"4 cry out thou (/SpV^ Imperative. 
 
 (Obs. These Imperative forms are the same in Pi-el as in 
 Kal.) 
 
 Future. 
 
 4 ye im.) will cry out PVV^ t thou (/.) wilt cry out ^V^ 
 
 ,they (m.) will cry out ^p^V. 
 
 And so (fr. DH*1 in Pu-al to be compassionated) we have the 
 Pu-al forms 
 
 Past Tense. 
 t they were c. ^^0 J s ? ie was compassionated ^QVT) 
 
 Future. 
 thou (/.) shalt be compassionated ^P^H^ 
 they {m.) shall be compassionated ^0T : 
 
 ye (m.) shall be compassionated 'ItoHnfi 
 
 (£) But when ' Compensation ' is made, as in (8) above, the 
 forms present so different an appearance that it is advisable to 
 give them more fully. The Pi-el & Pu-al forms of ""TO, in 
 Pi-el to bless, are therefore given at length on pp. 88 & 89. 
 
88 
 
 SOME Pl-EL FORMS. 
 
 -etc. \T& (w. Affs.) 
 
 he blessed 
 
 she blessed 
 
 thou (m.) blessedst 
 
 thou (/.) blessedst 
 
 I blessed 
 
 they (m. or/.) blessed 
 
 ye (m.) blessed 
 
 ye (_/.) blessed 
 
 we blessed 
 
 Pl-EL. 
 
 Infinitive forms. 
 
 ,etc. "^p.-?^ (w. prefixes) 
 Past Tense. 
 
 &) ^|13 3 s.m. 
 i1?1? 3 s.f. 
 1W3 2 s.m. 
 ??S 2 s.f. 
 *l?9 1 0. 
 WTJ 3 pi. 
 QW13 2 pi. m . 
 
 jnra 2 P i. f. 
 
 «?9 1 pi- 
 
 i(rtaryaa) dwj& , (Wja? & n ?1??) "PS? Partic ' forms - 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 ■Spa 2 s.m. 
 
 #&ss i/ww (m.) 
 i/ess Mow (/.) 
 &/<?ss ye (m.) 
 
 *?}? 2 s.f. 
 toSa 2 pi. m. 
 
 maria 2 P i. f. 
 
 Future. 
 
 /^ rae7(? bless 
 she will bless 
 thou (m.) wilt bless 
 thou (/.) wilt bless 
 J will bless 
 they (m.) will bless 
 they if.) will bless 
 ye (m.) will bless 
 ye if.) will bless 
 we will bless 
 
 T5K 3 s.m. 
 T5? 3 s.f. 
 X)lft 2 s.m. 
 •p™ 2 s.f. 
 
 (fta-) ipsa 1 B . 
 nana: 3 pi. m. 
 njytjri 3 pi. f. 
 
 imin 2 pi. m. 
 
 niran 2 P i. f. 
 ( n?-) ^tjj 1 P i. 
 
SOME PU-AL FORMS. 89 
 
 Pu-AL. 
 
 Infinitive forms, 
 -etc. 'iTp (w. Affs.) ,etc. fP* (w. prefixes) /f^ 
 
 Past Tense. 
 Ae was blessed ^p& 3 s.m. 
 
 s/^e was blessed ^?*?^ 3 s.f. 
 
 <^« (w.) was^ blessed v-tH^ 2 s.m. 
 
 */wa (/.) was* itei 1W3 o a .f. 
 
 I was blessed TP*P Is. 
 
 they (m. ovf.) were blessed ^^3 3 pi. 
 ye (m.) were blessed EP01J3 2 pi. m. 
 
 ye (/.) were blessed P??"^ 2 pi. f. 
 
 we were blessed ^?""P 1 pi. 
 
 Krtarfto) mrito /nypa & nrp&) fp? Partic. forms. 
 
 There is no Imperative in the Pu-al. 
 
 Future. 
 he will be blessed T^) 3 s.m. 
 
 she will be blessed T^? ^ s -f* 
 
 */ww (w.) w?7* £e blessed l*!^ 1 2 s.m. 
 ^e-w (/.) wilt be blessed 'TpR 2 s.f. ■ 
 / will be blessed ^~}^ 1 s. 
 
 they (m.) will be blessed ^"ll* 3 pi. m< 
 they (/.) will be blessed ^J^W 1 3 pi. f. 
 ye (m.) will be blessed 'D'ISfi 2 pi. m. 
 
 ye (/.) w?7/ be blessed ™:nhfi 2 pi. f. 
 we w?// £e blessed ^"P^ 1 pi. 
 
 For PAUSE-forms see Exercise-book, pp. 110-112.] 
 
90 SOME Pl-EL AND PU-AL AND HIPH-IL FORMS. 
 
 3. The Variations in Pi-el & Pu-al caused by a Third 
 Root-letter Pi Consonantal or Pi, or y, are the same as those in 
 Kal [(3) on pp. 81 & 82] and in Niph-al (p. 86), viz. 
 
 (a) Either (i) there is Furtive — under the 3 d Root-letter 
 when at the end after any Long- vowel other than — , or (ii) 
 a — is substituted for that Long-vowel, as in PI 9$ for Pi y$ 
 PlW] for rh&\, etc. 
 
 (b) A Euphonic — is substituted for the — under the 3 d 
 Root-letter in 2 s.f. Past, as in (3, b) on p. 82. 
 
 (c) The s.f. Partic. ends in H — — instead of T\ ~ ~, as in 
 (3, c) on p. 82. 
 
 (IV) Variations in ' Hiph-il' and ' Hoph-dV forms. 
 
 1. It is unnecessary to dwell at any length on Variations in 
 Hiph-il & Hoph-al forms caused by a 1 st Root-letter X or PI 
 or Pi or y. The only Variation is that a Compound- Shva often 
 occurs, and the Hiph-il Past has a — under its prefix Pi (cor- 
 responding to a Compound-Shva — under the 1 st Root-letter), — 
 as in the following, from "Itt^, in Hiph-il to cause to stand, 
 
 Hiph-il FORMS. 
 -,etc.HWl _,eto.TWna TpyPI pfigTj Infin. 
 
 ;?1P?0 ,Q?W}) *FWi *( n T?8 ! 3) T ?20 ) Past 
 
 .WWO /l£*P?0) fil T£?0 yip$ft j Tense. 
 
 .(linW) D*TtigO / n l??P & n T^) T ^ft Partic. 
 
 .(n™ypi) n w tCytsgri) rnwi & n&yn i mpe r. 
 
 Future. 
 
 /Map* XT9P?) n ~ or T ^ J* 1 - «" T 98? 1 ) n - or^W 
 
 Obs. A few Verbs have — to the 1 st Root-letter, preceded 
 by — in the Past (as in ^lpWPI Hiph-il Past 3 pi. fr. DTO), 
 by — in other parts (as in DFJSP, like T?B^ on p. 69). 
 
SOME HOPH. AND HITHP. FORMS. 91 
 
 HOPH-AL FORMS. 
 
 ;rnwr\ ,(fi*W!) n"«n /rrjfcyn) nayn \ Past 
 .uwi ;|m&yn) djvtopi ;nayn j Tense. 
 
 .(nnttgft) Dnasfib ,(J"H98? & «"H&??) w p ar tic. 
 
 itm (HOT) nayn n^*) "W 
 
 / - t: t / v • : t t ' - t: t / x - t: t ' - t:t 
 
 .naw (niiayn) nayn /nrwn) w 
 
 -t;t /* t ; - t; t ' :tt / x t:-t;t / :tt 
 
 Future. 
 
 2. No Variation is caused by any one of the four letters 
 $? n n X being Second Root-letter; — the Hiph-1l forms are 
 the same as those on pp. 68 & 69 ; and the Hoph-al forms 
 are as given on pp. 70 & 71. 
 
 3. A 3 d Root-letter PI Consonantal or PI or y causes, in the 
 IIiph-il and Hoph-al, the same Variations as those already 
 described on page 90 [3 (a-c)~\. Also 
 
 (V) Variations in l Hitltpa-eV form*. 
 
 1. In this Voice a 1 st Root-letter X or PI or PI or y causes no 
 Variation from the forms on pp. 72 & 73. 
 
 2. A 2 d Root-letter, *1 or one of the four letters ^ H H X, 
 causes (in the Hithpa-el) Variations corresponding to those 
 in the Pi-el ; for 
 
 The Dagesh-Forte in the 2 d Root-letter, which is a ' Charac- 
 teristic' of the Hithpa-el Voice, cannot stand when the 2 d 
 Root-letter is one of these five letters (1 y PI PI X). And 'Com- 
 pensation' for the omitted Dagesh, by lengthening — into — , 
 is made when the 2 d Root-letter is *1, and sometimes when it 
 is one of the letters y PI X, — but rarely when it is Pi. Comp. 
 (a — 8) on p. 86, and Tab. XVI (2) & Appendix. 
 
 3. A 3 d Root-letter PI Consonantal or PI or y causes, in the 
 Hithpa-el, the same Variations as those already described on 
 page 90 [3 (fl-c)]. 
 
 * A ' Slight'-vowel here replaces the Compound-Shva because it is followed by a 
 Moving-Shva (§ 56). 
 
92 REFERENCES. SOME IMPORTANT HITHP. FORMS. 
 
 [Obs. Variations caused by a Root-letter being one of the 
 four y Pi H X are mentioned in the Exercise-book as follows : — 
 
 For Verbs with 1 st Root-letter PI or H or ^, on pages 115-120 ; 
 
 For Verbs with 2 d Root-letter N or H or n or y, on pages 321 
 & 322, 368 & 369 ; 
 
 For Verbs with 3 d Root-letter H Consonantal or H or y, on 
 pages 370-374. 
 
 For the Paradigm of Verbs having 1 st Root-letter M or H or ^, 
 see Tab. XVI (1). 
 
 For the Paradigm of Verbs having 2 d Root-letter X or H or 
 H or y, see Tab. XVI (2) — see 'Appendix' thereto for Verbs 
 with ' Y for 2 d Root-letter. 
 
 For the Paradigm of Verbs having 3 d Root-letter H Con- 
 sonantal, or J! or y, see Tab. XVI (3)]. 
 
 4. There are some very important Variations in Hithpa-el 
 forms which we will mention now. 
 
 The H of the HPI of (Hithpa-el forms) changes places 
 with the First letter of the Root when this 1 st Root-letter 
 is either 
 
 (1) #, or (2) b>, or (3) D, or (4) ¥, and 
 
 N.B. Moreover when the 1 st Root-letter is ¥, the D of the 
 HPl is not only so transposed but is moreover replaced by t0 (see 
 IV. next page). 
 
 (I.) First Root-letter $, — 
 
 From *T&$, in Hithpa-el, to pour oneself out, the forms are 
 
 Infin. ^?Wn Absol. and Constr., With Affs. i^^H, etc. ; 
 Past 3 s.m. ^M*!, 3 s.f. *??#?, 2 s.m. W3ftB7t, etc. ; 
 Partic.s.m.^#P, s.f. T\^WK & fD M, pl. m .MSj^a, 
 
 etc. ; 
 Imper. 2 s.m. ^fi^Pl, 2 s.f. 'ZBMtfo , etc. ; 
 
 Fut. 3 s.m. ^fi^, 3s.f.or2s.m.^ri^n, 2 s.f. VM©*!, etc.; 
 
SOME HITHPA-EL FORMS. 93 
 
 (II.) First Root-letter, &, — 
 From 132^, in Hithpa-el to hire oneself out, the forms are 
 Innn. ^ribTl Absol. and Constr., With Affs. i^n^H, e tc. : 
 Past 3 s.m. ^^H, 3 s .f. ?Tl3Wn, 2 s.m. Jjn3riBTl,etc.; 
 
 Partic. s.iO^fP, sj.^ftfrti &n^T)'m p l. m . Dn|PlB>&, 
 
 etc. ; 
 Imper. 2 s.m. ^3WPl, 2 s .f. * h T|WTl J e tc. 
 
 Fut. 3 s.m. ^J???, 3 s.f. or 2 s.m. WJ1, 2 s.f. ^Wn, etc.; 
 
 (III.) First Root-letter D, — 
 From 7^D, in Hithpa-el to load oneself, the forms are 
 Infill. 7!inDn Absol. & Constr., With Affs. TCafiDTl, etc. ; 
 Past 3 s.m. TSlfiDn, 3 s .f. nSllfiDH t 2 s.m. ^a^DTl t etc. ; 
 Partic. Bjn}?SNBb t s.f. rbmto&rb&Mb, pl.m .D^aplDp |0 tc. 
 Imper. 2 s.m. ^MJTI, 2 s.f. v^?"! 1 , etc.; 
 Fut. 3 s.m. 73JP1D*, 3 s.f. or 2 s.m. ?|fi&fi , 2 s.f. vMDFl , etc. 
 
 (IV.) First Root-letter ¥, — 
 
 From p"l¥, in Hithpa-el to justify oneself, the forms are 
 
 Infin. f^Vn Absol. & Constr., With Affs. ip^??, etc. ; 
 
 Past 3 s.m. j*!^ 3 s.f. ^P^) t 2 s.m. fip^n, e tc. ; 
 
 Partic. s.m. p^.P^ ■^T?WfP« ri P19?9» pi- m. D^DVp, 
 
 etc. ; 
 Imper. 2 s.m. pl^H, 2 s.f. *j?^^, etc. ; 
 
 Fut. 3 s.m. p^py, 3 s.f. or 2 s.m. p^P^fi, 2 s.f. *pf3Nti, etc. 
 
 See also Exercise-Book ['Note I' on pp. 89 & 89(*), and 
 'Note' on pp. 315-318: and, for Pause-forms, page 112 (c)]. 
 
94 VARIATIONS FOR FIRST ROOT- LETTER tf. 
 
 (!"l) Some Variations when the 1 st Eoot-letter is X. 
 
 In the Exercise-Book, § 170 [page 116], the Great Rule 
 is stated that 
 
 "When the 1 st Root-letter is either H or H or J?, the pre- 
 fixes * & H & 3 f° r the Future Kal 
 
 (i) Generally take — when the 2 d Root-letter bears 
 
 — ; and 
 (ii) Generally take — when the 2 d Root-letter bears -r. 
 N.B. This Great Rule does not, so far as (i) is concerned, 
 hold in the case of Verbs whose 1 st Root-letter is N. The 
 Student may perhaps have wondered why such Verbs were ex- 
 cluded on page 79. The reason for the exclusion may be seen 
 from parts (3) & (4) & (5) of the following ' Note' (A). 
 
 Note (A). Some Variations in Future (Kal) forms token the 
 1 st Root-letter is K. 
 
 (1) Some Verbs with 1 st Root-letter X have Fut. Kal forms 
 like those in (c) on page 81 ; thus, from T*ftK to be firm, 
 
 (2) And some Verbs with 1 st Root-letter K have Fut. Kal 
 forms like those in (d) on p. 81 ; thus, from D&^tt to be guilty, 
 
 (3) But some of these Verbs have Fut. (Kal) forms such as 
 the following from l^ltf to lie in wait, 
 
 * A ' SLiGHT'-vowel here replaces the Compound-Shva, hecause there is Shva 
 Moving heneath the next letter here [§ 56 ahove]. 
 
 f Instead of the like form from 2HS, we find in Prov. i. 22 the irregular form 
 •13nxn 2 pi. m. Future Kal. — For the form |-13nXFl in Ps. iv. 3 see hereafter. 
 
VARIATIONS FOR FIRST ROOT-LETTER X. 95 
 
 (4) And some have such forms as *1DX* IDXft, etc., from 
 1DX to bind. 
 
 (5) Moreover there are certain Verbs with I s * Root-letter X, 
 which have a special form of Future Kal, — such as, from 
 /3X to eat, 
 
 he will eat Q%}& &)" '?# 3 a.m. 
 
 she will eat Qr^ &) ^Xft 3 s.f. 
 
 thou (m.) mlt eat QI&Fl &) 7?XH o B . m . 
 
 thou (/.) wilt eat h'SXR 2 s.f. 
 
 J will eat /blW / (^ + &) ^kt 1 s. 
 they (m.) will eat ^TOX 11 3 pi. m . 
 
 *% (/.) will eat nraxn 3 p i. f. 
 
 y<? (m.) ?n7/ £dtf V?3NJn o p] # m> 
 
 ye (/.) will eat iWDKfl 2 pi. f. 
 
 rce wz'# <?a* , n ^J /6^ &) ^^ 1 pi. 
 
 Note (B). Variations in other Voices/or 1 st Root-letter X. 
 
 In other Voices the forms of Verbs whose 1 st Root-letter is K 
 are like those of Verbs whose 1 st Root-letter is D or H or y — 
 as on pages 82-85, & 90-91. — But see also Exercise-book, § 190 
 (/3) [page 129] ; and, for some irregular forms, see there pages 
 130 & 130**. 
 
 * The Tone-accent is on the LoNG-vowel — in the closed final syllable here 
 [page 31 (D, i)]. And the — is shortened into — when the Accent is removed, 
 as in "IJDN'l 3 s. m. Fut. Kal. fr. IDS (with a prefix 1 to be mentioned hereafter) ; 
 and so in lENfll 3 s.f. of the same. 
 
 t b$t is for !?3&&, bl'H for ^3KK, and rta'X for r6?NK. 
 
96 some great classes of variations. 
 
 (1) Seven Great Classes of 'Variations.' 
 
 (a) In accordance with the use of ' 3 ' for ' 1 st Root-letter,' and 
 'tf' for '2 d Root-letter,' and '?' for ' 3 d Root-letter,'— mentioned 
 on page 75, — 
 
 Verbs whose 1 st Root-letter is X are called 'Verbs X 3.' 
 
 And so 
 Verbs whose 1 st Root-letter is s are called ' Verbs * 3/ 
 Verbs whose 1 st Root-letter is 3 are called 'Verbs 3 3/ 
 Verbs whose 2 d Root-letter is 1 are called 'Verbs 1 y,' 
 Verbs whose 2 d Root-letter is * are called 'Verbs * J?/ * 
 Verbs whose 3 d Root-letter is tf are called 'Verbs N 7/ 
 Verbs whose 3 d Root-letter is PI are called 'Verbs Pi 7/ 
 
 (b) There are often important Variations in the case of Verbs 
 belonging to these several Classes, and also to the following 
 Class: viz., 
 
 Verbs whose Second and Third Root-letters are 
 
 the same ; as, for instance, ^D to go round, and 
 
 T"tt to go in troops. 
 
 This last Class, having Roots of the form ^3, i.e. with the 
 
 Second Root-letter repeated as their 3 d Root-letter, — may 
 
 be said to have the Root-form yj/3 instead of 7$?3, and so may 
 
 be called ' Verbs y ^3 ' f for convenience sake. 
 
 We must be content to refer to the Exercise-book [pages 
 128-201, and the Tables] for the 'Variations' in the case of 
 
 * It is not necessary to give these specially in the following Chart For 
 
 (a) Some forms merely have *— in place of the •! of the corresponding )']) forms, 
 and 
 
 (j3) Other forms are exactly the same as those from Verbs l'j?. [Comp. page 154 
 of the Exerc.-book.] 
 
 f The expression 'Verbs J? I?,' by which some would call them, is very objectionable 
 — or, rather, it is a dad designation. Comp. Exerc.-bk., page 179, Obs. xx. The 
 Rabbinic designation is Dy-ID?, i.e. doubled or reduplicated, because of the repetition 
 of the 2' 1 Root-letter. 
 
SEVEN CLASSES OF VARIATIONS. 97 
 
 all these Verbs in the following order — [see also the collection 
 of Examples in the Exercises thereon (XXVIII to XLII)], — 
 
 (1) Verbs K'fi, Table XVII, 
 
 (2) Verbs **3, Table XVIII, 
 
 (3) Verbs j'fi, Table XIX (with 'Notes' for the Verbs 
 
 Pip? to take, & j]"U to give), 
 
 (4) Verbs fy (& "'$) Table XX, 
 
 (5) Verbs jtyfi, Table XXI, 
 
 (6) Verbs K'S, Table XXII, 
 
 (7) Verbs p|S, Table XXIII. 
 
 Here we may not do more than give the following ' General 
 Chart' of Leading Forms of the last Six of these Seven 
 Classes of Verbs,— viz. (2) Verbs *'S, (3) Verbs j's, (4) Verbs 
 \% (5) Verbs J^fi, (6) Verbs tfS, (7) Verbs PlS- [For 
 (1) Verbs K 3 see above, pp. 94&95J. In this 'Chart' the several 
 Voices are arranged in separate columns arranged from right to 
 left. And the several 'parts' are arranged in horizontal lines 
 across, — first the 'Infinitives' ('Ads.' for 'Absolute form,' and 
 ' C for 'Construct form') ; then Past-Tenses 3 s.m., 3 s./., & 
 2 a.m. ; then Participles ; then Imperative forms 2 s.m. & 
 2 s/. ; and Future forms 3 a.m. and 3 s./. & 2 a.m. The Roots 
 are given in the right-hand Margin : — the forms without any 
 Note-mark belong to the Root without Note-mark for that 
 set of forms, and forms with any Note-mark attached thereto 
 belong to the Root having the same Note-mark in the right- 
 hand Margin. Many of the words given in this 'Paradigm ' 
 for 'Paradigm '-purposes are merely ' Paradigm '-forms. 
 
 As the Chart is intended for reference, the Student may 
 find it useful to have the Tone-syllable marked by an Accent. 
 The Accent (— ) is here employed [comp. Note || on page 17]. 
 
98 TWO VARIATIONS AT ONCE. 
 
 But whenever the Student may write down a form, in Com- 
 position, he should never write down the Accent, — as 
 Hebrew Scholars do not accentuate their Composition, see p. iv 
 of the ' Preface to the Continuation of the Exercise-book.' 
 
 N.B. There are several Verbs from which there are forms 
 having two sets at once of the 'Variations' mentioned 
 above. Thus, 
 
 From !1S\ the 3 s.m. Fut. Kal H3" ('apocopated' ft**) 
 has *— corresponding to the *— of 20" & itD*Fl in (2) of 
 the 'Chart' and has H— corresponding to the PI 77 of 7X7^ & 
 J-tafi in (7) of the ' Chart.' 
 
 So, from the Root HtD3, the 3 s.m. Fut. Kal PltS 1 ' (apocop. £*) 
 has also the J"!^ corresponding to that of H aP & Tw^P\ in (7) 
 and moreover has Dagesh-F. in the 2 d Root-letter standing for 
 the omitted 1 st Root-letter 3 as in the case of $tf & S^ft in (3) 
 of the ' Chart.' 
 
 [These, and a few other examples, are given on page 174 of 
 the Exercise-book. And a full List of the Verbs and Verb- 
 forms, belonging to two sets at once of the Seven Classes 
 (1-7) above, may be found on pages 267 to 314 of the same.] 
 
3 If 
 
 d ddd 
 
 5 -3 S 3 
 
 3 3 
 
 _3 3 _ 23. _'S. S^S. 
 
 I | 
 
 t* 
 
 ^oa 
 
 •3 a „ -j 3 
 
 =g. r "3 g.'g. 
 
 s .3 -*s -a CI 3 
 
 3 ,«i S .3 
 
 H 3 3 3 
 
 -s:q =1.3.3 
 
 
 .<s. -z % % : n 1 ? 
 
 3 .5 -, d 3 si » 2J - a J - u 
 
 3$ 
 
 :_3.;; 
 
 O -3 3 
 
 ~ 5 o ~ cj »j n 
 
 --3 *'Lf .: 'I 
 
 
 -3 :*^T 
 
 ,-.3 ^'^^J- 
 
 --B S S^JT^T -V 
 
 5 S3. 23. - -3 '3 3 '3- -u- £■ 
 
 : 3--f 
 
 X % z 
 
 § § 3 
 
 r 3- 3. ~ Si 3- ~ g. ~ -y -3. 3. 
 
 Mr3#s'i?|4^ 
 
 S "3 ^"i~4-iJ 
 
 3. 3. 
 
 « w 3 3 - © 
 
 3 3 r 3 :3 3 .^3 k ■ 
 
 .S-s=§ 
 
 '.S.g. 
 
 3 -■* 
 
 =9 ^3 
 3 - 
 a -z g. 
 
 1 ri JT 
 
 
 •0 3 
 
 "2:3 
 
 *§.s- 
 
 ;§:§,§ 
 
 ^ p 
 
 
 !2 B - Vj 
 
 ^^g_o 
 
 7§^ 
 
 M 33 
 
 '= . "'• 1 :<3 1 
 
 .3 S:1 
 
 q "3 
 
NOTES. 
 
 99 
 
 Notes on the preceding 'Chart.' 
 [As stated on page 97 — we give Leading Forms merely in 
 tins * General Chart.' It would be too unwieldy to be useful 
 if more forms were given in it. And in some cases such 'other' 
 forms are unnecessary. "Where such are necessary they are 
 given in these 'Notes.'] 
 
 Note (b). 
 
 (Other forms.) 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 m,WZ 2pl.m. 
 
 rwa 2pi.£ 
 
 r : i- 
 
 Future. 
 
 *mt\ 2 s.r. 
 
 IT i" V 
 
 !gfe< 3 pi. m. 
 
 i : • 
 
 rw'jri s P i. f. 
 
 ji^n 2 pi. m. 
 
 rwan 2 pi. £ 
 
 t : i- • 
 
 Note (a). 
 (Other forms.) 
 Imperative. 
 Jftt? 2 pi. m. 
 
 i : 
 
 ilEiB* 2 pi. f. 
 
 t : i" 
 
 Future. 
 
 >2m 2 s.f. 
 
 IT i {.■■ " 
 
 W&1 3 pi. m. 
 
 npm 3 pi. f. 
 intrn 2 pi. m. 
 rtineto 2 P i. f. 
 
 nn_ i n^'i 1 pi- 
 
 Note (c). 
 (Endings for other forms.) 
 
 Imperative. 
 !)_ 2 pi. in. 
 
 n^- 2pl-f. 
 
 Future. 
 
 l_ 2s.f. 
 
 PI- is. 
 
 5|__ 3 pi. m. 
 
 r\y~ 3 pi. f 
 
 T IV 
 
 !)_ 2 pi. m. 
 
 nrl 2 pi. f. 
 
 fl- 1 Pi- 
 
 Past Ten so. 
 (or _) IV— 2 s.f. 
 
 t- 3 pi 
 
 (or _) DJV— 2 pi- m. 
 (or_)]n*_ 2 pi. f. 
 (or _) W_ 1 P L 
 
 (Continued on next page.) 
 
[To face page 90.] 
 
 MS d 
 
 ), (3), 
 
 (VII.) HITHPA-^L. 
 
 (y) 
 
 etc. x^tonn 
 
 it : - : • 
 t i" - : • 
 
 etc. 
 
 1 (e) 
 (p!73)'( Z ) 
 
 (P- 73) (z) 
 
 nWnn (Ab S .) 
 etc.n^ann(o.) 
 
 rfarnn 
 
 n^ann 
 
 etc. (c) 
 
 it - : • 
 
 00 
 
 i- - : • 
 
 etc. (c) 
 
 Sunn , rfeanft 
 
 i- j • iv * ; • 
 
 etc. (c) 
 
 (Vl-EL. 
 
 (y) 
 
 It : 
 
 I- 
 
 etc. 
 \e) 
 
 N$ 
 
 65) l (, 
 
 65) ( 
 53 (A 
 
 L s 
 
 nrfe 
 
 it : 
 
 T « 
 
 etc. ( 
 TO 
 
 rra 
 
 IT - 
 
 w 
 
 f 
 
 I" 
 
 etc. (|§ 
 etc. (i 
 
 M 
 
 3 For transposition of the D & 
 
NOTE?. 
 
 99 
 
 Notes on the preceding 'Chart.' 
 [As stated on page 97 — we give Leading Forms merely in 
 this ' General Chart.' It would be too unwieldy to be useful 
 if more forms were given in it. And in some cases such 'other' 
 forms are unnecessary. Where such are necessary they are 
 given in these 'Notes.'] 
 
 Note (b). 
 
 (Other forms.) 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 i i : 
 
 nj$a 2 P L£ 
 
 t : i- 
 
 Future. 
 
 >&m 2 s.r. 
 
 W# 3 pi. m, 
 
 TWXft 3 pl- f. 
 
 t : i- • 
 
 WXF\ 2 pl- m. 
 
 rwan 2 P i. f. 
 
 t : i- • 
 
 Note (a). 
 (Other forms.) 
 Imperative. 
 13^ 2 pl. m. 
 
 I : 
 
 T)p& 2 pl. f. 
 
 Future. 
 
 "2m 2 s.f. 
 
 W&l 3 pl. m. 
 
 npefa 3 pl- f- 
 
 intf n 2 pi. m. 
 rontfn 2 P i. f. 
 
 Note (c). 
 (Endings for other forms.) 
 
 Imperative. 
 5|_ 2 pl. m. 
 
 n^- 2pl-f. 
 
 T IV 
 
 Future. 
 t_ 2s.f. 
 
 ni is. 
 
 IV 
 
 5|_ 3 pl. m. 
 
 ni*- 3 pi. f 
 
 *|_ 2 pl. m. 
 
 n y_l 2 pi. f. 
 h- ipL 
 
 Past Tensn. 
 (or _) JV_ 2 B.f. 
 
 *n-,*n*- i& 
 
 U. 3 pi 
 
 i 
 
 (or _) DfV— 2 pl- m. 
 
 (or_)|n^_ 2pl. f. 
 
 (or _) !)}*_ 1 pl. 
 
 (Continued on next page.) 
 
99* notes on the 'chart' (continued from p. 99). 
 
 Note (d). For other Participle-forms add the endings 
 PI- s.f., D*_ PL m., ni-Pi. f. 
 
 Note (c). Por othor Participle-forms replace the — by 
 
 n (or n — ) s.f, & — pi. m., ni — pi. f. 
 
 it : v v iv if ■ t t : 
 
 Note (f). For other Participle-forms add the endings of 
 Note (d), and replace the vowel of the prefix- 
 letter by — . 
 
 Note (g). For other Participle-forms replace the ^ — or i by 
 
 P13- or PIS- s.f, M- or D*£- PL m, 
 
 IT - IT ■ I" - l" • 
 
 IT) 2— or ni3— PL f. ; and in Niph-al & Hiph-il 
 replace the Vowel of the prefix-letter by — . 
 
 Note (h). For other Participle-forms replace p| — of the s.f. by 
 
 D»- (i.c. *-) PL m, Hi- PL £ 
 
 <.■ i- i 
 
 Note fx). See also Tab. XX (from the Exercise-book) on 
 pp. .100 & 100*. 
 
 Note (y). See also Tab. XXI (from the Exercise-book) on 
 pp. 101 & 101*. 
 
 [The Student need not trouble himself with the Notes in 
 these two Tables.] 
 
 (z) But the PL (f.) forms end in PDfc* — ; thus, in the Kal, 
 PlJKttD Imper. 2 pi./, & riWipri Fut. 3 & 2 pi./, 
 etc. 
 
 N.B. (i). The — of the open syllable tf— , is for the 
 
 of a closed syllable (such as *7 — of *Jp3 etc, and 
 W— of ^iW^T etc.)— iu Past & Imper. (2 s.m.) 
 & Fut. Kal, — in the Past 3 s.m. Niph-al & 
 Pu-al & Hoph-al, — and in the Fut. Pu. & Hoph. 
 
 (ii). But (of X ) takes the place of the — (as of 1 — ) 
 
 in the 2 a & 1 st Persons of— (a) the S?3 form of Past 
 Kal, — and (/3) the Past-Tense of other Voices also. 
 
ADDITIONAL NOTES. 99** 
 
 Notes on some Fut. forms (Kal & Hiph.) of Tabs. XX & XXI. 
 
 (a) The 3 s.m. Fut. Kal Dtt? [Tab. XX] becomes Dj£ in 
 Up") with the Prefix of p. 122 ; for, the Accent being removed 
 from the last syllable here, the ] is shortened into — o as on 
 p. 27. — So Dlpfi 3 s.f. or 2 s.m. Fut. Kal becomes Dpn in 
 
 JV T |t IT 
 
 Dpni * 
 
 | T IT - • 
 
 (/3) So the 3 s.m Fut. Hiph. D\T becomes Dp* in Dp*1> etc.* 
 [For a more full statement of this, with more examples, see 
 Exercise-book, pp. 156-158.] 
 
 (7) So 3D' 3 s.m. Fut. Kal and 2D* 3 s.m. Fut. Hiph. [Tab. 
 XXI] give the forms 20' in 3D*1 (Kal) and 3D* in nD*l 
 
 J ° TIT T i.1- VIT V1.T- 
 
 (IIiph.), etc.* 
 
 * "When the 3d Root-letter is n or V , and sometimes also when it is ~\, a — is 
 put instead of both the — S in the Kal and the — in the Hiph. ; and so we 
 have "Ip'l for both Kax and llivu. Fut. 3 a. m. from T»D, etc. 
 
100 
 
 xxvn 
 
 < 5 
 
 •s, S v; 
 
 
 6 ^ 
 
 H. "Si 01 "E. 
 CN <N ~* 
 
 Pi. 
 
 « M h [l) 
 
 r± c± rs!- r& £-' ^ O ^ S" 
 C» <> Q- Q g: £: Q» a a 
 
 E- E .. c;. ~ Ei Ei £ ^^ 
 
 O CN 
 
 Ps 
 I I 
 
 6 ]|j D r? 
 
 « '!'£•' 9 
 
 £ c ^ r. 
 
 5 9 *J o 
 
 « n > *J 
 
 ■"3 C> $■ eu 
 
 £ C C 
 
 E* 
 
 E <->.>— i 
 
 
 E C Ei EL E • E 
 
 Pl- n- n* rtt- n„ 
 
 &•• L» L».. iJ- '£».. .P" 
 
 E" «■ El Eb C! S» 
 
 «- n • — ^ 
 
 •8 
 
 hi S J? n- rr- 
 
 2 k^^Liv.'®- 
 
 o S] «*• g 
 
 ;• £> 
 
 ix- ix- ix ix ix lar" a a a ix- 
 
 S '5- .S- .3- .5- S § .2 .ch *5 
 a — 
 
 H 
 
 Pm 
 
 > B 
 
 a a .n. 
 
 rx 
 
 a a a a a a a 
 
 '5:, $5 '5^ St '5;, S • '5- '5> '5 
 
 a Ot Q Q • Q« O- Q» Q- Q 
 
 n e- m» e- ««■ el e;l ^ 
 a — 
 
 rx 
 
 .rx 
 J3-- 
 
 a a a a a 
 
 Su "5» *5i. "Si, q- 
 
 n E' E • E- 
 
 
 "■* a 
 
 n: n: rrc irv n" 
 
 rx-' ix- a G a 
 
 [2 E>- E E 
 
 ( - TT'S§0SIB39S) 
 
 r> 
 
 IX 
 
 
 
 t> 
 
 <j, 
 
 i'- 
 
 u- 
 
 
 IV 
 
 
 u 
 
 irs 
 
 rr; 
 
 r - 
 
 r>- 
 
 Q 
 
 
 
 u 
 
 IX 
 
 IX 
 
 '2-. 
 
 J3- 
 
 IX 
 
 SJ« 
 
 £.<•• 
 
 1> 
 
 Ei; 
 
 *n 
 
 u 
 
 rr 1 
 
 IT" 
 
 O: 
 
 l.L- 
 
 n- 
 
 n- 
 
 Ei; 
 
 .JJ- 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 n 
 
 rr 
 
 r 
 
 r. 
 
 K 
 
 rr 
 
 r 
 
 r 
 
 n 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 r^- 
 
 11; 
 
 
 r>'- 
 
 n- 
 
 IAj 
 
 uj 
 
 IA.' 
 
 
 ixs 
 
 
 u 
 
 u- 
 
 r»- 
 
 ^> 
 
 p. 
 
 u- 
 
 t.' 
 
 JJ 
 
 Q- 
 
 u 
 
 
 
 l_ 
 
 E- 
 
 E 
 
 E- 
 
 
 EL 
 
 hi- 
 
 »-« 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 r- 
 
 rr- 
 
 rr- 
 
 rr- 
 
 r- 
 
 r- 
 
 rr- 
 
 r.- 
 
 rr- 
 
 r:- 
 
 O- 
 
 E- 
 
 E" 
 
 E- 
 
 E 
 
 c 
 
 E 
 
 c 
 
 c- 
 
 E 
 
 c- 
 
 E- 
 
 o 
 
 IX 
 
 r >,. 
 
 i^ 
 
 n 
 
 o 
 
 r^ 
 
 l^ 
 
 i^ 
 
 r- 
 
 n 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 i>. 
 
 J3L 
 
 iJ- 
 
 Ui, 
 
 i" 
 
 !<• 
 
 iJ- 
 
 i" 
 
 i->> 
 
 JJ'. 
 
 £<: 
 
 u - 
 
 a 
 
 US 
 
 u- 
 
 O- 
 
 <>.. 
 
 O- 
 
 < \- 
 
 i<- 
 
 U- 
 
 a 
 
 "i" 
 
 1- 
 
 1- 
 
 E- 
 
 E 
 
 E- 
 
 ^-, 
 
 Es 
 
 a 
 
 Ei; 
 
 r\ 
 
 
 i— i cd 
 
 M H 
 
 E- 
 IX 
 
 a 
 
 40- 
 
XXVIII 
 
 100* 
 
 * 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 •< . 
 
 * E 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 <*A 
 
 S 
 
 < 
 
 H 
 
 5 s 
 
 a » 
 
 ^ 
 
 B <^ 
 
 
 g 
 
 ^ 
 
 i 
 
 "^ 
 
 
 0. 
 
 S M 
 
 CO 
 
 ft 
 
 "a. 
 
 
 00 
 
 m oo 
 
 GO 
 
 "o. 
 
 Pi 
 
 "E. 
 
 "H. 
 
 "E, 
 
 -H CN 
 
 <N 
 
 (N 
 
 SS 
 
 fn CO 
 
 CO 
 
 CN CN 
 
 -" 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 IM 
 
 <M 
 
 — 
 
 rx- 
 
 rx- 
 
 /x- 
 
 .rx- 
 
 rx- 
 
 E>- 
 
 E* E> 
 
 S6> 
 
 fAy 
 
 — ' — 
 
 E- 
 
 , « 
 
 rx" 
 
 s 
 
 5 
 
 s 
 
 Q • 
 
 c 
 
 rx- ix- 
 
 £-" 
 
 
 EE 
 
 rx- 
 
 EE 
 
 E* 
 
 * 
 
 a 
 
 * 
 
 5 5- 
 
 a 
 
 3 
 
 .fi.-rx 
 
 Q 
 
 .rx-n. 
 
 a 
 
 * ^ 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 I 
 
 
 n n> 
 
 
 n ?.► 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 
 rt E 
 
 
 - 1 E 
 
 
 £3- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Q- 
 
 
 
 
 
 £> 
 
 E 
 
 
 
 
 r 
 
 rr 
 
 (M 
 
 E 
 
 
 
 
 
 r: 
 
 
 
 
 
 < c 
 
 n 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 v 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 j 
 
 pi- 
 
 n- 
 
 n- 
 
 Pi- 
 
 n : - 
 ""fi 
 
 e? 
 
 E: E = 
 
 v:r 
 
 
 E= 
 
 E: 
 
 E: 
 
 rx'" 
 
 's*.. 
 
 1,. 
 
 ;j- 
 
 7j 
 
 e 
 
 n- 
 
 n- n- 
 
 n- 
 
 n- 
 
 ■£j.. 
 
 
 '£»■• 
 
 'K 
 
 r 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 E 
 
 
 E 
 
 ii. 
 
 e 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 E 
 
 r:- 
 
 rr 
 
 rr 
 
 it- 
 
 /x- 
 
 e 
 
 E- E 
 
 52: 
 
 ni.-' 
 
 E 
 
 E- 
 
 E- 
 
 FX* 
 
 /x- 
 
 er 
 
 rx- 
 
 jx- 
 
 
 ix- 
 
 IX- rx- 
 
 ri.- 
 
 
 /2_- 
 
 n.- 
 
 FAr- 
 
 
 /j 
 
 S- 
 
 5 
 
 5-- 
 
 a 
 
 "5 
 
 5 p- 
 
 a 
 
 s 
 
 "5" 
 
 3 
 
 '3-- 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 £* 
 
 "F 
 
 
 
 
 
 E 
 
 
 e" 
 
 
 p. 
 
 "O: 
 
 ix 
 J3> 
 
 jx 
 
 rx 
 
 £)•; 
 
 rx 
 
 '3i. 
 
 a 
 
 e 
 
 5 : 
 
 E E 
 rx rx 
 
 Si, 
 
 hi' 
 
 3- 
 
 E- 
 rx 
 
 '5i- 
 
 E- 
 
 rx 
 
 '5- 
 
 E 
 rx 
 
 5l 
 
 IX 
 
 
 *■ 
 
 w 
 
 
 a" 
 
 a p- 
 
 a 
 
 Q- 
 
 Q- 
 
 D- 
 
 h 
 
 
 
 e 
 
 
 
 
 I- 
 
 
 n H 
 
 '^ 
 
 iz K 
 
 1- 
 
 n 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Qt 
 
 
 
 
 
 3- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 E 
 
 
 
 
 
 n: 
 
 
 
 
 
 £v_ 
 
 E 
 
 E E 
 
 5i" 
 
 r^ 
 
 E- 
 
 E- 
 
 E- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 13. 
 
 rx rx 
 
 rx 
 
 
 ri. 
 
 n. 
 
 n. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 '5'_ 
 
 "Si- Q 
 
 "5^ 
 
 '5- 
 
 '5' 
 
 '5- 
 
 Ol 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 a p^ 
 
 a 
 
 
 °" 
 
 c- 
 
 Ri? 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 fz" 
 
 
 r:^ 
 
 
 i> 
 
 r> 
 
 c» 
 
 r>- 
 
 f^y 
 
 n> 
 
 E^ E^ 
 
 X* 
 
 n^ 
 
 Er 
 
 E- 
 
 E- 
 
 n> 
 
 r^ 
 
 rv- 
 
 rx- 
 
 rx- 
 e h 
 
 
 rx- 
 
 tX" cl- 
 
 py 
 
 
 r>> 
 
 m- 
 
 n> 
 
 
 £]_ 
 
 iJ- 
 
 Q 
 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 a &. 
 
 a 
 
 Q 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 iJ 
 
 El- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■a 
 
 
 ■o 
 
 
 ix- 
 
 
 
 
 ri> 
 
 jx- 
 
 gf' 
 
 nJ- 
 
 
 
 
 
 IX" 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ir •• 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 e 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 j;_ 
 
 E 
 
 E E 
 
 % 
 
 ». 
 
 E 
 
 E 
 
 E 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 ix- 
 
 rx- 
 
 a p^ 
 
 a 
 
 £3- 
 
 
 
 (i.- 
 &' 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 n h 
 
 
 e' 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 E 
 
 r 
 
 e- 
 
 ir- 
 
 ix 
 
 E- 
 
 E E 
 
 52=- 
 
 
 E- 
 
 E- 
 
 E 
 
 E : 
 
 e- 
 
 e 
 
 e 
 
 e- 
 
 E- 
 
 C E 
 
 E 
 
 E- 
 
 E- 
 
 E- 
 
 rx 
 
 rx 
 
 Cs. 
 
 fX 
 
 rx 
 
 n. rx 
 
 O- 
 
 
 rx 
 
 IX 
 
 rx 
 
 
 Ou 
 
 3 
 
 '3 
 
 '5l, 
 
 5-. 
 a 
 
 Ql 
 
 Si O" 
 
 Oi 
 
 "5- 
 p- 
 
 Ou 
 
 5- 
 
 Oi 
 
 
 a^ 
 
 p. 
 
 g- 
 
 Q 
 
 a 
 
 a O: 
 
 a 
 
 £)•• 
 
 o- 
 
 Q- 
 
 1- 
 
 
 
 e 
 
 
 
 
 1- 
 
 
 E 
 
 
 »-«i- 
 E 
 
 1- 
 
 IT 
 
 
 
 [cj-g § 'suuoj 
 
 ■osaBj] 
 
 1 
 
 tz 
 
 
 [9fZ J] 
 
 
 E 
 
 -">•-> -60 
 
 := *=" o 
 CO I - " c< 
 
 w 3- . 
 
 •^ C E-- 
 
 oj •■ E- 
 
 a 
 
 75 
 
 ■ £ 
 
 « 2 
 
 . C\ ... 
 
 a) A 
 
 . o 
 Fii£ E" 
 
 rx r 
 
 a o 
 
 rx> 
 n 
 
 ■^-< 
 
 - o « 
 J ^ > 
 
 >c 
 
 o O 
 
 - n 
 
 u 
 
 r i 
 
 r; 
 
 Ph 
 
 < 
 
 n 
 
 • t; 
 
 B 
 
 SI 
 
 
 n 
 
 "■' 
 
 
 ir 
 
 EL 
 
 /a 
 
 rx 
 
 B 
 
 i . 
 
 
 
 ■g 
 
 -, 
 
 t_. 
 
 
 a 
 
 n 
 
 :j 
 
 
 
 '■» 
 
 n 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 J-: 
 
 
 #r* 
 
 £ 
 
 rj 
 
 c 
 
 fly 
 
 
 B 
 
 E 
 
 r- 
 
 < 
 
 
 / 
 
 * 
 
 " 
 
 < 
 
 
 
 r£ 
 
 p- 
 3 
 
 CO 
 
 3- 
 
 3h 
 n 
 
 .rl^ 
 
 - ^ 
 
 41 
 
101 
 
 XXIX 
 
 t-n 
 
 > 
 
 
 
 -a 
 
 X 
 
 Hi 
 
 3 
 
 
 BJ 
 
 >. 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 I- 
 
 
 OJ 
 
 
 •c 
 
 <u 
 
 .1) 
 
 3 
 
 1- 
 
 .C 
 
 
 
 n 
 
 
 n 
 
 •^ 
 
 n 
 
 
 c 
 
 E 
 
 
 
 - 
 
 n 
 
 <£ 
 
 U-, 
 
 pd S £ 
 
 
 S3 w 
 
 
 
 x) n 
 
 & 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 w 
 
 t 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 d 
 
 «S 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 w 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^^ 
 
 
 ed Fl 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 >J 
 
 > 
 
 
 
 
 
 D 
 
 n 
 n 
 
 TO 
 
 M 
 
 < 
 
 is -^ 
 
 o 
 
 d 
 o 
 
 H S 
 
 ^ 
 
 S 
 
 S. 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 *A 
 
 
 0. 
 
 o 
 
 < 
 
 M 
 
 s 
 
 "^ 
 
 g 
 
 "-; 
 
 "■4- 
 
 fe 
 2 
 
 U & 
 
 £ 
 
 ™ ■ 
 
 to 
 
 0) 
 
 GO 
 
 to 
 
 "S. 
 
 "Hi 
 
 "3, 
 
 "p. 
 
 < 
 
 (h 
 
 CO 
 
 to 
 
 ■q. 
 
 "3, 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 Ph CO 
 
 eo 
 
 M 
 
 <N 
 
 -h 
 
 CO 
 
 IN 
 
 <M 
 
 -^ 
 
 Ph 
 
 ►^ 
 
 (N 
 
 CN 
 
 tM 
 
 <N 
 
 ij 
 
 
 * 
 
 
 -f- 
 
 -f- 
 
 
 
 
 -f- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 * 
 
 * 
 
 * 
 
 
 «<! 
 
 .Q- 
 
 .a- 
 
 Q-- 
 
 Dl 
 
 O^ 
 
 n. 
 
 o 
 
 n 
 
 Di. 
 
 rv 
 
 Q. 
 
 D' 
 
 a 
 
 
 .Q- 
 
 .o- 
 
 Q- 
 
 Q-' 
 
 M 
 
 n 
 
 n 
 
 r-l^ 
 
 n 
 
 PI. 
 
 M- 
 
 t\~ 
 
 m- 
 
 P 
 
 M 
 
 P 
 
 r\" 
 
 
 
 n 
 
 m- 
 
 ri 
 
 Pi-i 
 
 1-1 
 
 
 rH*«JM. 
 
 ■*""■*, 
 
 "" 
 
 n 
 
 t- 
 
 c 
 
 F;- 
 
 
 'ca 
 
 'Cii 
 
 'r-k 
 
 > 
 
 
 JC> 
 
 * 
 
 ^"^ 
 
 *-*>■ 
 
 h-5 
 
 
 
 
 n 
 
 
 
 
 
 Dt 
 
 a 
 
 ' 
 
 
 
 
 CD 
 O 
 
 Pi 
 
 o 
 
 
 P" 
 
 rr 
 
 
 13" 
 
 IT- 
 
 |- . 
 
 #-|h 
 
 ^<i- 
 
 r-> 
 
 „ 
 
 ^-... 
 
 *-».- 
 
 n- 
 
 ^-«.. 
 
 ry . 
 
 rnt- 
 
 
 f - - 
 
 n- 
 
 n- 
 
 rr- 
 
 
 QL 
 
 QU 
 
 13, 
 
 DU 
 
 n. 
 
 o 
 
 Di 
 
 Di 
 
 o^ 
 
 O 
 
 Q- 
 
 o. 
 
 Qi 
 
 
 a. 
 
 A, 
 
 /j' 
 
 Qi 
 
 111 
 
 r\ 
 
 n^^/v. 
 
 P1- 
 
 * 
 
 
 
 pi- 
 
 
 rn 
 
 .n 
 a 
 
 
 .P1- 
 
 n 
 
 \l 
 
 
 n" 
 
 n-" 
 
 P 
 
 P- 
 
 £ 
 
 rr. 
 
 n • Q: 
 
 i 
 
 * 
 
 ■30^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ri" 
 
 
 
 
 
 iz" 
 
 
 £)- 
 
 » rr- 
 
 
 i . 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 i 
 
 ij 
 
 
 ^^ 
 
 "n 
 
 n» at 
 
 ~^ n 
 
 
 It 
 n 
 
 
 
 
 
 . I- 
 
 
 
 
 n 
 
 
 • 1- 
 n 
 
 . r 
 P' 
 
 . 1 
 P 
 
 
 
 .o 
 
 .Q 
 
 .Q 
 
 .o 
 
 .n 
 
 .o 
 
 .Q 
 
 .Q 
 
 .Q 
 
 .o 
 
 .Q 
 
 .Q 
 
 (3- 
 
 
 .Q 
 
 .Q 
 
 .o 
 
 a 
 
 J 
 
 riL 
 
 ri*. 
 
 n- 
 
 F1-. 
 
 n • 
 
 mi, 
 
 ' "iL. 
 
 n^ 
 
 n- 
 
 rv 
 
 n> 
 
 rtL 
 
 .O 
 
 
 ni. 
 
 n-- 
 
 n 
 
 rti. 
 
 <w 
 
 n 
 
 n 
 
 r\- 
 
 n 
 
 nt 
 
 n- 
 
 n 
 
 n 
 
 n- 
 
 ri- 
 
 n- 
 
 n-. 
 
 riL 
 
 
 n 
 
 P- 
 
 n- 
 
 n- 
 
 5M 
 
 
 
 ;"" 
 
 
 r: 
 
 & 
 
 e- 
 
 R 
 
 
 
 Eii 
 
 *-» 
 
 n 
 
 
 .Q 
 
 
 
 £" 
 
 /*■> 
 
 
 -Q 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 n- 
 
 
 
 
 h-H 
 
 
 n- hl 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 *~it 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 -.. n 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 n 
 
 
 
 
 ^—-" 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 J 
 
 .Q 
 
 .o 
 
 .Q 
 
 .D 
 
 .Q 
 
 .Q 
 
 .Q 
 
 .Q 
 
 .Q 
 
 .£> 
 
 .a 
 
 .o 
 
 Q" 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 >o 
 
 rw. 
 
 n;. 
 
 n-- 
 
 ni 
 
 n-- 
 
 Ml 
 
 rlL 
 
 til 
 
 n- 
 
 ri' 
 
 m 
 
 nu 
 
 .Q 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 .n 
 
 n -£•■• 
 
 n- 
 
 n 
 
 nt 
 
 n • 
 
 n- 
 
 n- 
 
 n- 
 
 n 
 
 n- 
 
 ri- 
 
 nt 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ •■ 
 
 "*"V. 
 
 
 n 
 
 i^- 
 
 E- 
 
 Jy 
 
 ' v * 
 
 rri; 
 
 £.- 
 
 ^2 
 
 n 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 • 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 n 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 
 n- n:. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 M 
 
 
 -V n 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 *-+ 
 
 
 
 ++ 
 
 ++ 
 
 ++ 
 
 
 ++ 
 
 •(-+ 
 
 ++ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ir> 
 
 rr>- 
 
 rr" 
 
 rr= 
 
 n: 
 
 r:; 
 
 n; 
 
 n; 
 
 H: 
 
 rr;' 
 
 nr 
 
 rrr 
 
 Q: 
 
 
 n>- 
 
 ITi- 
 
 rr- 
 
 rrr 
 
 
 D-, 
 
 o„ 
 
 O- 
 
 Dl 
 
 Dl, 
 
 O 
 
 D- 
 
 n 
 
 Di. 
 
 o 
 
 Q- 
 
 o- 
 
 QU 
 
 
 OL 
 
 DL 
 
 Q: 
 
 o- 
 
 
 n 
 
 n ~C- 
 
 n- 
 
 n 
 
 r|H 
 
 .1=1- 
 
 .Fl- 
 
 .m- 
 
 n 
 
 .n 
 
 .n 
 
 .n- 
 
 r\ 
 
 
 n 
 
 n- 
 
 n 
 
 P- 
 
 <d 
 
 
 " ^ 
 
 •*^- 
 
 - 
 
 n 
 
 O 
 
 C 
 
 c- 
 
 **v. 
 
 rr^ 
 
 Cl 
 
 
 
 
 
 *■ 
 
 * T 
 
 nt- 
 
 '3 
 
 
 F1- Q: 
 
 - ITf 
 
 fv- Ol 
 
 
 n 
 
 
 r • 
 
 E 1 - 
 
 
 iO, 
 
 ri 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 1- 
 n 
 
 
 It 
 rr 
 
 
 
 n 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 n>- 
 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Co 
 
 J - - 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 r: 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 rr 
 
 r 
 
 rr 
 
 tz 
 
 rr 
 
 rr 
 
 rr 
 
 n 
 
 r: 
 
 Q 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Oi 
 
 Oi. 
 
 rj. 
 
 Q. 
 
 O' 
 
 O' 
 
 D> 
 
 n 
 
 cii 
 
 St 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 n" 
 
 r »i- 
 
 n- 
 
 .rl- 
 
 .n- 
 
 n 
 
 ,m 
 
 .n 
 
 .n- 
 
 n 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 (Z 
 
 o 
 
 G 
 
 C- 
 
 * r 
 
 Cl 
 
 £-- 
 
 ^j 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 * 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 rr 
 
 ,_^ 
 
 rr- 
 
 IT- 
 
 fl- 
 
 rr- 
 
 rr- 
 
 rr- 
 
 rr- 
 
 r- 
 
 rr- 
 
 rr- 
 
 Q- 
 
 
 n- 
 
 n- 
 
 rr- 
 
 rr. 
 
 *"S 
 
 c 
 
 S 
 
 c • 
 
 c- 
 
 c- 
 
 c 
 
 C 
 
 r: 
 
 rr- 
 
 C" 
 
 C- 
 
 c- 
 
 c- 
 
 
 c 
 
 c- 
 
 c- 
 
 c 
 
 |— 
 
 
 •*^ 
 
 
 ■«a| 
 
 
 •»^ 
 
 ...-^ 
 
 
 •T^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 •*=* 
 
 ■T\ 
 
 •»=» 
 
 |— 
 
 "r 
 
 e3 
 
 r— 
 
 rL 
 
 ,-.. 
 
 !"!« 
 
 r'- 
 
 TL 
 
 r" 
 
 r 1 
 
 r' 
 
 r- 
 
 ru 
 
 
 l~i- 
 
 r— 
 
 r" 
 
 ri 
 
 /—S 
 
 |- 
 
 
 r- 
 
 r 
 
 rt 
 
 r- 
 
 r ' 
 
 r - ' 
 
 i — ' 
 
 r ■ 
 
 j-.. 
 
 r" 
 
 j- 
 
 
 r*^ 
 
 r~- 
 
 r 
 
 l~" 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 n: 
 
 O 
 
 e- 
 
 g- 
 
 
 a 
 
 Ep 
 
 *-% 
 
 
 
 1- 
 
 
 
 rr 
 
 s_< a 
 
 
 
 
 \ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 y 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 [• 
 
 \\o[aq • 
 
 \I OS^ 33g] 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 42 
 
XXX 
 
 101* 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 s i 
 
 
 
 
 
 E| 
 
 
 1=) 
 
 « a 
 
 D K 
 
 < 
 
 s 
 
 CO 
 
 co 
 
 g 
 
 "5. 
 
 ">A 
 
 3* 
 
 
 o. 
 
 o r' h j 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CJ 
 
 
 
 ft. CO 
 
 * 
 
 r\ 
 
 CO 
 
 * 
 
 E- 
 
 * 
 
 E> 
 
 CN 
 
 E" 
 
 .Q- 
 
 52- 
 
 n 
 
 CO 
 
 n 
 
 CO 
 
 E- 
 Q 
 
 CM 
 
 r:- 
 n 
 
 E 
 
 D- 
 
 * 
 
 n 
 
 ^3; .4: 
 S » * - 
 
 • -d 
 
 ft .« 
 £ r- 
 
 52- • 
 r: . 
 
 
 
 
 r— 1 
 «3 
 
 lO 
 CO 
 
 ft 
 ft 
 
 CO 1 
 
 CM fci 
 
 ft 
 
 M 
 
 
 
 X! 
 
 .Q- 
 
 E 
 
 .a- 
 
 E 
 
 .13- 
 
 E- 
 
 13 
 
 52=- 
 
 fj.'. 
 
 
 a- 
 
 rz 
 
 .3- 
 
 n 
 
 - r t- 1- 
 n r n ■ 
 
 r .^r-.^ 
 
 X g 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 L—J 
 
 rr'. t>D 
 
 K' 
 
 1 
 
 n 
 
 n 
 
 rl 
 
 T" 
 
 n 
 
 rv 
 
 
 n- 
 
 
 
 .. !N 
 
 
 
 
 01 
 
 
 n 
 
 E 
 E 
 
 52° 
 
 r 
 
 'E 
 
 Q 
 
 6i 
 
 E- 
 
 E 
 
 E- 
 
 'A- 
 
 61 
 
 E 
 
 E- 
 
 E- 
 
 n 
 
 n £,1 
 
 
 e 
 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 VI 
 
 13 L 
 
 QL 
 
 f3 L. 
 
 Ql 
 
 Q> 
 
 EH. 
 
 rj' 
 
 P"° ^ 
 
 £ «• 
 
 
 Oi 
 
 ^- , Q'- 
 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 n^ 
 
 n^ 
 
 PI- 
 
 n 
 
 
 o 
 
 n 
 
 r2' 
 
 F . •" T3 •-« 
 
 ^ 
 
 6«j M 
 
 
 
 9 
 
 il 
 
 
 > 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 ft 
 S 
 
 .1- 
 
 n 
 
 .1- 
 n 
 
 .1- 
 n 
 
 . I- 
 
 .1- 
 
 n 
 
 . 1- 
 
 n 
 
 
 n 
 
 
 .1- 
 n 
 
 _* n xi 
 
 £ s S >» ® 
 
 
 
 r 
 
 S 
 
 ft ^ 
 
 In 
 0) 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 *V . • — • £ £v 
 
 n •' 
 
 
 n 
 
 CO 
 
 6= * 
 
 —> 
 
 p 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 "" =- n ^ fi'- 
 
 i "" 
 
 ^ ° 
 
 
 n ^ 
 
 • 
 
 S 1 p; 
 
 r- 
 E- 
 .TZ 
 
 ? 
 
 n 
 
 E 
 Q 
 
 n 
 
 E- 
 .Q 
 *"!■, 
 
 n 
 
 E- 
 
 .a 
 
 n- 
 
 52; 
 
 J3 
 
 rr„ 
 
 .b 
 
 ri 
 
 n- 
 
 E 
 
 .Q 
 
 n •• 
 
 n 
 
 n- 
 
 E 
 .Q 
 
 n 
 
 .3" 
 
 Q 
 
 ri 
 
 
 
 
 
 52r 
 
 .a 
 
 n- 
 
 
 rr 
 
 
 n^ 
 
 .3' 
 
 n- 
 rii 
 n 
 
 n "" = 
 
 ri c •= > * 
 
 •p n-a, n .. 
 g •- >• r: 
 
 « -= E ; S .. 
 
 •1 
 
 P i 
 
 
 - 
 
 04 
 
 eo 
 
 rt 
 
 m 
 
 - 
 
 a 
 
 I* 
 
 .2 «* 
 
 to w 
 
 1 * 
 
 § 
 
 u n 
 
 . E 
 
 r : ^ 
 
 Ci g 
 
 as 1 -* 
 
 "Pi'- 
 
 « .S 
 
 aT co 
 ■a oj 
 
 c 
 
 3 
 1" 
 
 CD 
 
 ccj 
 
 -= 
 
 CO 
 
 E 
 1 
 
 CO 
 
 E 
 
 .0 
 n 
 
 E 
 .Q 
 
 n 
 
 E- 
 .Q 
 rlL 
 
 n 
 
 E- 
 
 .Q 
 
 n- 
 
 52" 
 .Q 
 rn, 
 
 ri 
 
 .h 
 r l- 
 
 E- 
 .O 
 
 n.. 
 
 n • 
 
 n 
 
 E 
 
 .a 
 
 ni 
 n • 
 
 .o 
 n 
 
 a 
 
 E: 
 E 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 I J= C a. Vl 
 
 e a 2 ^ ^ 
 
 > r: 
 
 . 
 
 
 14 
 s 
 
 ft 
 
 a 
 rr- 
 
 1 C 
 
 CO 
 
 u 
 
 £ S 
 
 3 
 
 CO 
 
 ft 
 
 c>J 
 
 
 E- 
 
 E- 
 
 E- 
 
 52- 
 
 /j: 
 
 E- 
 
 rc^ 
 
 E- 
 
 
 E 
 
 
 
 Di. 
 
 p|. 
 
 Cil 
 
 Q 
 
 1 1 
 
 
 
 « <a 
 
 - 
 
 2 
 
 j>- 
 
 a "J 
 
 * "ft 
 
 £ -° 
 
 CJ> 
 
 as 
 
 z^ 
 
 £)L 
 
 
 
 *"*• 
 
 |l 
 
 
 
 
 n^ 
 
 |I 
 
 ^ = E- J= n:- 
 
 - n ■ = C 
 
 c — ■ 
 
 CD — 
 O 
 
 ii- 
 
 ■ 
 
 25, 
 
 > 
 
 5T: 
 
 n^ 
 
 £■ 
 
 E' 
 
 E- 
 
 m- 
 n 
 
 
 It 
 
 rc> 
 
 |s 
 
 r: 
 
 
 r 1 
 
 eo 
 O 
 
 IT' 
 
 E- |t 
 
 to SJ 
 
 ■ '0 
 o> 
 
 
 E- 
 n 
 
 T- 
 
 QL 
 
 ai 
 
 Qi. 
 
 *■ 
 
 i -• 
 
 Q L 
 
 
 r-*T 
 
 r . r; — ^ 
 
 01 
 
 S 
 
 n-^: 
 
 „ E 
 
 t 9* 
 
 
 rf 
 
 i 
 h 
 
 n 
 
 n 
 
 n- 
 
 52- 
 
 131. 
 
 rT 
 
 ri 
 
 n h 
 
 /JL. 
 
 -rl,-'^ 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 U 
 
 7*J? 
 
 ft 
 
 cj 
 
 o 
 "5 
 
 
 
 
 n 
 
 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 ■pcSU 
 
 c r . 
 
 n 
 D 
 
 n 
 
 9 
 
 
 
 9 
 — 
 
 rrj - ^ 
 
 bo £ 
 J 
 
 
 52t 
 
 E 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 p 
 
 ^ 
 
 eS c 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 E 
 
 E 
 
 E 
 
 52 
 
 g. 
 
 E 
 
 J5 
 
 E 
 
 r-\ 
 
 • it ft ^i. 
 
 1 «> 
 
 a 
 
 Pm 
 
 9 
 
 JS- « 
 
 O CO 
 
 ja- 
 
 It 
 E 
 
 n 
 
 n 
 
 5^ 
 n 
 
 St 
 
 n 
 
 
 5' 
 
 
 5' 
 
 rl2 
 
 OX. 
 
 n 
 
 -a 
 .£ * 
 
 CO 
 
 E- s 
 
 a ™ 
 
 • H CO 
 
 1- C 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 n 
 
 
 n h 
 
 
 n . E ^ r P^ 
 
 "° 52 
 
 S f 
 
 n " £ 
 
 " 2 
 c £ 
 
 a; -S 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 = 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 E: 
 C!. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 E 
 
 fc- 
 
 E 
 E" 
 
 E 
 
 E 
 E- 
 
 52: 
 
 C* 
 
 E- 
 E 
 
 n:- 
 
 E- 
 
 E 
 
 E 
 
 r.E- y . . £ 
 
 i 
 "52- 
 •"■ r: 
 
 CJ 
 
 > 
 
 9J 
 
 ^1 
 |. 
 
 L -3 
 
 1 6 
 2 
 
 "a? 
 
 
 43 
 
 r 
 
 i— - 
 
 r 
 
 r 
 
 1— 
 
 r- 
 
 ri. 
 r\ 
 
 r 
 i— ' 
 
 r— 
 
 r 
 r- 
 
 
 ri. 
 r^ 
 
 5,- a-_r^ »-»• M 
 - § Qfc-S 
 
 > 
 C 
 
 
 u 
 1 
 
 *S 
 
 - 
 
 XI 
 OS 
 
 CO 
 
 fcl 
 
 E 
 
 
 
 
 
 n: 
 
 
 /; 
 
 
 
 \- 
 rt 
 iz 
 
 B ^ It M 
 
 •1 t - 
 * •£ 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 
 ^ Q 
 
 ;5 ^ 
 
 CJ 
 
 ft 
 CJ 
 
 ■a 
 
 01 
 
 ft 
 c- 
 
 
 tf 
 
 E 
 E 
 
 
 
 ['Mopq 
 
 a; osp 
 
 S^S] 
 
 
 
 Jr. 
 
 43 
 
102 NOTES ON TABLE XXI. 
 
 Some Notes on Table XXI. 
 
 (1). From Hoots having the 2 d and 3 a letter the same, or (in 
 other words) having their 2 d Root-letter repeated as their 
 3 d Root-letter, there are often forms which agree entirely 
 with the forms given on pp. 58-73 [Comp. Exercise-book, 
 Obs. XXI (on p. 180)]. Such forms need not be given in 
 the Table of 'Variations. 5 
 
 (2). "When the 2 d Root-letter is dropped (as is seen to be 
 frequently the case in Tab. XXI), Dagesh-forte is put into 
 the 3 d Root-letter whenever this letter has a vowel as seen 
 in the Table. This Dagesh implies the omitted 2 d Root-letter. 
 
 (3). The Dagesh however cannot be put if the 2 d & 3 d Root- 
 letter be one of the five letters which do not receive Dagesh. 
 Compensation for this Dagesh is sometimes made (as seen 
 in Note §). 
 
 %* The Roman Numerals xxix & xxx on the upper margin 
 of this Table, and the Figures 42 & 43 on the lower margin 
 of it, are the Numbers for the pages of this Table (XXI) 
 amonj? the Tables of the Exercise-book. 
 
 [So also of course in the case of the Roman Numerals xxvii 
 & xxvni, and the Figures 40 & 41, on the upper and lower 
 margin of the preceding Table (XX).] 
 
PARAGOGIC LETTERS. — SOME PAUSE-FORMS. 103 
 
 (T) Certain letters sometimes called 'Paragogic.' 
 
 The letter Jl, mentioned on page 60 (Notes ii and iii) and 
 elsewhere, above, is by some called ' Paragogic.' 
 
 So also the letter T] which is often found at the end of 
 
 2 s. m. Past forms (as in HFOETI 2 s. m. Past Kal of 1L5T1, 
 nnV^ 2 s. m. Past Pi-el of f*ftX, and many others), — and 
 sometimes at the end of some other forms. Comp. Exerc.-bk., 
 page 82. 
 
 So also the letter j which is found sometimes at the end of 
 Future forms ending in ^ on pages 59, 61, 63, etc. (i.e. the 
 
 3 pi. m. & 2 pi. m.) ; and also, but rarely, at the end of the 
 2 s. /. ending in *—. [Exercise-book, §§ 145 & 146, pages 
 88 & 89.] 
 
 And so also the letter j which is sometimes, but rarely, found 
 at the end of the 3 pi. Past [ib. p. 82 (iv. /3)]. 
 
 So also the letter * [ib. p. 84 (e)], and the letter K [ib. p. 82 
 (iv. a)]. 
 
 (!"l) Note on ' Pause '-forms of Verbs. 
 
 We have hitherto abstained from dwelling at all upon 
 1 PAUSE-forms ' in these pages. It may be well to ask for a 
 little attention now to some ' Pause '-forms of Verbs — in this 
 brief ' Note.' 
 
 As said in § 41 above, " The PAUSE-form of a word is a form 
 of it in which the word is more or less changed from its natural 
 state by reason of the Stop or Pause." 
 
 The chief changes are 
 
 (i) The lengthening of a Short- vowel into the corresponding 
 Long one, — as — into — ; 
 
 (ii) The replacing Shva by a Vowel. 
 
 N.B. (a) It is important to observe that in Verb-forms it is 
 specially the Second PooT-letter of which the Vowel, or the 
 Shva, — as the case may be, — is liable to this change. 
 
104 
 
 ' PAUSE '-FORMS OF VERBS. 
 
 KB. (6) The 2 pi. m. and the 2 pi./, of all Past-Tenses, in all 
 Voices, have the Tone-accent on the last syllable always and 
 are unchanged in Pause. 
 
 (g) As the Student knows already, — Any closed syllable with 
 a Long- vowel therein is the Tone-syllable of that word [Comp. 
 § 55, 8 (i & ii), p. 26]. 
 
 "We will give now the Past-Tense Kal as each of the words 
 is in Pause, — (a) the 7^3 form, (/3) the 7^3 form, (7) the 7^3 
 form. The letter "p," to the left of a word, stands for the 
 expression 'Pause-form.' And any one of these words here 
 
 WITHOUT THE " p " is the SAME IN FORM AS WHEN IT IS NOT IN 
 
 Pause. "We will use ' Silluk' [§ 39 (1)] as the Pause-accent. 
 The Student should compare the forms given here with the 
 corresponding forms given on pages 58, 76, & 78. 
 
 Past-Tense forms (Kal), in Pause. 
 
 7?3 08) 7V? (a) 
 
 (see page 76) (see page 58) 
 
 :fSn p. i-IJJS 3s.m. 
 
 p. : rrasn p. j rnps 3 s .f. 
 p. tflxfin p. trnjjB g B .m, 
 
 p. ift^? 1 ? p* :iTn i?? 2 s.f. 
 p. •roan p. : *jjnj5fi 1 b. 
 
 p. tWjBn p. JVTJ3& 3 pi. (m. or f.) 
 
 mmm tt3 ET7pP 2 P i.m. 
 tgnterj fjgrjpB 2 P i. f. 
 
 P . tttfen p. ttfigfi 1 pi. 
 
 The Student will have no difficulty about the Pause-forms 
 when the Pause- vowel is in place of a Short- vowel, — as the 
 — in (a) & (J3) above, in place of the — of the corresponding 
 
 ty? (7) 
 
 (see page 78) 
 
 j 7b; 
 
 p. trb'y 
 trh'y 
 
 p. th'y 
 
 : nrhy 
 
 i \fhy 
 
 p. th'y 
 
'PAUSE '-FORMS OF VERBS. 105 
 
 forms on pages 58 & 76. But he may be glad to have some 
 guidance with regard to the choice of Pause-vowel which is 
 to replace a Shva. He sees that here, 
 
 In IB), rttSn is the Pause-form of H^SPl (3 s./. on p. 76), and 
 
 T •■ T t:t 
 
 1¥5n is the Pause-form of ftflBh (3 pi. on p. 76) ; 
 i.e. that — , the Long- vowel of the 2 d Root-letter in T*3Pl 
 (3 s.m.) the first word in the set on page 76, is the Pause- 
 vowel in place of a Shva to the 2 d Root-letter elsewhere in 
 this set. 
 
 So he sees that, 
 
 In (7), rh'y is the Pause-form of Tr?y (3 s./. on p. 78), and 
 )/'y is the Pause-form of T?y (3 pi. on page 78) ; 
 i.e. that — , the LoNG-vowel of the 2 d Root-letter in 7'y (3 s.m.) 
 the first word in the set on page 78, is the Pause-vowel in 
 place of a Shva to the 2 d Root-letter elsewhere in this set. 
 
 Also he sees that, 
 
 In (a), mp3 is the Pause-form of mp2 (3 s.f. on p. 58), and 
 *np3 is the Pause-form of )1p$ (3 pi. on page 58) ; 
 i.e. that — , the Pause-vowel in place of the — of *1p3 3 s.m. 
 the first word in the set on page 58, is the Pause- vowel in 
 place of a Shva elsewhere in this set. 
 
 It may be well to illustrate the matter a little further, by 
 means of the Future Kal forms. 
 
 "What is the Pause-vowel to be given to the 2 d Root-letter 
 in place of the Shva of the p in the Future forms HpSfi 2 s./., 
 and Hpfl* 3 pLm., and HpSfi 2 pLm., on page 59 ? 
 
 It is seen that in the first word of the set there (i.e. in the 
 3 s.m. of the Future) the 2 d Root-letter has — . This — is the 
 Pause-vowel required. And so the 2 s.f PAUSE-form is J HpSft 
 the 3 pi. m. PAUSE-form is J *np£5*, and the 2 pi. m. PAUSE-form 
 
 is : npsn. 
 
 Again what is the Pause-vowel to be given to the 2 d Root- 
 letter in place of the Shva of the 3 in the Future forms ^^7^1 
 2 s.f., and fcfelfr 1 3 pi. m., and W?$hft 2 pi. m., on page 61 ? 
 
106 'PAUSE '-FORMS OF VERBS. 
 
 It is seen that in the first word of the set there (i.e. in the 
 3 s.m. of the Future) the 2 d Root-letter has — . This — would 
 in Pause be lengthened into — . This — is the Pause-vowel 
 required. And so the 2 s./. Pause- form here is t *$3 /fi , the 
 3 pi. m. PAUSE-form is J ^2T, and the 2 pi. m. PAUSE-form is 
 
 These explanatory remarks will, it is hoped, sufficiently 
 illustrate the following Great General Rules (given, with 
 examples, on pages 110 & 111 of the Exercise-book), viz. 
 
 I. When the 2 a Root-letter has a Vowel, 
 
 (a) if that Vowel be Long, the word is generally un- 
 changed in Pause, 
 
 (ft) if that Vowel be Short, this SHORT-vowel is 
 generally lengthened into the corresponding Long- 
 vowel. 
 
 [For some exceptions, and for the Euphonic — some- 
 times in place of a — , we must be content to refer 
 to the Exercise-book (page 110 & Notes).] 
 
 II. "When the 2 d Root-letter has Shva, a Vowel is generally 
 given to it in Pause. And this Vowel is generally the same 
 as either 
 
 (i) the Vowel which the 2 d Root-letter has in the 
 
 first word of the Tense or set, or 
 (ii) the Vowel which the 2 d Root-letter takes in 
 
 Pause, in the First word of the Tense or set. 
 [See also page 111 of the Exercise-book.] 
 In the case of Imperative forms, the 2 s.m. is the first word 
 of the set. Therefore 
 
 (i) Of the 2 s./. & 2 pi. m. of the Imper. Kal forms on page 
 59, the Pause-forms are J HpS 2 s./. & J HpS 2 pi. m. For, 
 
 Obs. The — under the 3 of Hp3 & 'HpS on page 59 is merely 
 a ' Slight '-vowel [see Exerc.-bk., page 86 (Obs.)], and the 
 Vowel-form is of course dropped and replaced by Shva when 
 the next letter has a Vowel — as it has in Pause. And the 
 
'PAUSE '-FORMS. PRON.-AFFS. TO VERBS. 107 
 
 Pause- vowel is — here, because the 2 d Root-letter has — in the 
 2 s.m. form *7D£l (see page 59). — Similarly 
 
 (ii) of >&& 2 s./. & ^lS 2 pi. m., of the Imper. Kal forms 
 on page 61, the Pause-forms are : ^17 2 s./. & J ^17 2 pi. m. 
 For the ' Slight '-vowel — is as before dropped and replaced by 
 Shva when the next letter has a Yowel — as it has in Pause. 
 And the Pause-vowel is — here, because the first word of the 
 set (page 61) is £J07 the — of which would be lengthened into 
 -7- in Pause. 
 
 This is so very important a matter that it may be well to give 
 a few more examples of it here. 
 
 (a) Of rrWN* 1 s. (with H) of the Fut. Kal on page 80, the 
 Pause-form is 'jnibgli, the 'Slight '-vowel of the 1 st Root- 
 letter being replaced by — when the next letter has a Yowel. 
 And so the Pause-forms of the 2 s.f. & 2 pi. m. (on page 80) are 
 
 : nbyn 2 s/. & nbgri 2 P i. m. 
 
 (b) So : nmVK is Pause-form of the 1 s. (with Pi) of the 
 Fut. Kal on page 81 ; and 1 11*")^ of the 2 pi. m. there. 
 
 (c) And so J^QnKn is Pause-form of ^Qntffl 2 pi. m. Future 
 Kal like ^pXH 2 pi. m. on page 94 ; and this last Pause-form, 
 with the | (by some called ' Paragogic ') of page 103, becomes 
 
 N.B. Pause- forms are sometimes used "when not in Pause. 
 And thus we find this last word j'Dnxn used as 2 pi. m. Fut. 
 Kal from 1HX (with j), a ' Pause-form not in Pause,' in 
 Ps. iv. 3. 
 
 (t0) Pronoun- Affixes added to Verb-forms. 
 
 Pronoun- Affixes may be attached to Verb-forms, to represent 
 Objective Pronouns, — and also sometimes where, in English, 
 a Preposition or some other word may be required. 
 
 Many Verb-forms undergo some change on receiving suclv 
 Affixes. See Exercise-book, Obs. XXXIII-L [on pp. 208-212], 
 and Tabs. XXIV-XXXI [on pp. xxxv-xlvi of Tabs.]. 
 
108 noun-forms. 
 
 (*) Notes on 'Noun-forms.' 
 
 On page 56 we gave the Declension of a Masculine Noun 
 with Pronoun- Affixes. There the purpose was to exemplify 
 the AFFix-forms, and therefore a Noun was chosen which 
 remains unchanged in form when the Affixes are attached. 
 So the Feminine Noun given on page 57 remains unchanged 
 except as regards the Feminine ending PI — . It may be well 
 to give here a few brief remarks on Noun-forms themselves. 
 
 There are in Hebrew not only Singular and Plural forms, 
 as on pages 56 & 57, but also a Dual form for which the special 
 ending is D* 1 — (thus, from "V a hand, Dual D*"V hands). The 
 Dual may be said to be chiefly used as a special Plural (if one 
 may say so) for things ' double ' or * in pairs ' (Comp. Exerc- 
 book, page 32). And besides the Feminine Singular ending 
 T\— (page 57), there is also the ending T\~ T7 (in Pause 
 i T\~ —), and T\-r — (in Pause ift-r —), and the endings 
 
 The number of Various forms of Nouns in the Singular is 
 very great, and many of them undergo more or less change of 
 Vocalisation both when ' in Construction,' and on taking the 
 Plural form, and on receiving ' Pronoun- Affixes.' Practically 
 the Student will doubtless find the help of his Dictionary more 
 available to him than any treatment of the subject here could 
 be. [Probably the multitude of forms would be utterly con- 
 fusing to him at present.]* We may give here a few leading 
 ' Declensions ' — as they may be called. 
 
 * It is, however, a very interesting subject, though it may seem to be very dry 
 perhaps to many, and it is certainly abstruse, and in some parts rather intricate. The 
 present writer is somewhat fond of it, and would like to enter upon it here if he might ; 
 and he fancies that he could offer an attempt at arrangement involving some little 
 improvement upon the various ' Methods of Classification ' (if such they can be called) 
 which have been adopted by various writers on the subject. [Some writers on 
 Hebrew Grammar simply pass the subject by almost, or wholly, unnoticed.] It is one 
 of those subjects which a public-spirited Journal might admit to its pages, — if not 
 unwilling to give some little space to matter which only very few would know to 
 be useful, and which many (it is to be feared) would consider tedious as well as dry 
 aud difficult. 
 
NOUN-FORMS. 7j^ Tr?VQ 109 
 
 it t' it t : * 
 
 I. (a) The 7^2 form. Take, for example, ^11 a word 
 [Exerc.-book, Tab. IX]. [(— ) marks Tone-syllables here.] 
 Singular 1^ « tvord*, * i.c.'f "^ wore? 0/; — 
 
 my word *1!2F\ 
 
 thy (m.) word 
 thy (/.) word 
 
 his word 
 her word 
 
 v t : 
 
 our word ^121 
 
 my words 3**"QTj 
 
 our words ! D < H11 
 
 l" t : 
 
 your (m.) word E^ni" 7 ! their {m.) word E'l^tt 
 your (f) word j^l^l their {/.) word fT^j 
 Plural B^in words, 'i.c.'t ^.? >T ! words of;— 
 thy (m.) words "*] ^-^.Ihis words 
 thy (/•) words ^!y^\her words 
 your (m.) words Qjj^^n 
 your if.) words j^l^! 
 (/?) The corresponding Feminine form PI 7^3. Take, fo 
 example, PljTJX righteousness [Exerc.-bk., App x (C) to Tab. IX]. 
 
 Singular ^jjHy righteousness, 'i.e.' ^jjT]V righteousness of. 
 
 v-in 
 
 it t : 
 
 rrtn 
 
 t iv t : 
 
 their (m.) words DH "lyi 
 their (f.) words j^H^! 
 
 my r. 
 
 ow r. 
 
 wra 
 
 ?/«/ (m.) r. 
 thy (/.) r. 
 
 /«'s right 8 , 
 her right 8 . 
 
 nnrm 
 
 un Tn * >WMr (w,) r * ^WPffl*** r (w>) r - D Pl"H* 
 
 lycwr (y.) r. 
 
 ^eir (y.) r. 
 
 Plural *"JjH¥ righteousnesses, 'i.e.' ^j?"l¥ righteousnesses oj. 
 
 my r. sTliTRC 
 
 oar r. WHiTl^ 
 
 £/«/ (m.) r. 
 thy (/.) r. 
 
 ynprsihisr. 
 
 *Vtfnt\brr. 
 
 your (m.) r. DJ^PT^ 
 
 ^tfir (m.) r. 
 
 £/^> (/.) r. 
 
 vnpnv 
 
 orDTlp*W 
 
 Djrnjrrc 
 or IPPT? 
 
 * Also a </«'«y. t See Note * on p. 56. 
 
 1 In Pause t t|— . • In Pause t Sp— . 3 In Pause '. *■ 
 
f 
 110 'construct' forms, etc. 
 
 [Obs. (a) The — under the ¥ [in the 'Construct' forms of (/3) 
 and in the forms ' with Pron. -Affixes '] is a 
 ' Slight '-Vowel, which replaces the — of the "£ 
 when the next letter has — (see § 56 above). 
 
 (b) For Great Rules respecting ' Construct ' forms, 
 viz. that they 
 
 (i) Drop the Vowel next before the Accented 
 vowel of a word (if it can be so dropped), 
 
 (ii) Shorten generally — (in a closed final syllable) 
 
 into — , 
 (iii) Replace — sometimes by — , etc., 
 (iv) Replace the ending H~ by T\~> 
 (v) Replace the ending Pi— by T\~, 
 (vi) Retain unchanged a *— (except in the last 
 syllable of the Plural (w.) form), — also 
 \ (or — ), and J|, — 
 (vii) Remain the same (without change) in the case of 
 
 certain forms ^fi & SttS & hvZ, Sttb & hVB, 
 etc., 
 (viii) Change the forms 713 into 713 and 7*3 into 73 
 
 (ix) Change the Plural ending Q* into * — and 
 
 the Dual D <t — also into "> — 
 
 we may refer to the Exercise-book [§ 56, pp. 35 & 36, where 
 examples are given in illustration of the Rules]. Also, 
 
 (A) For the very important Rule that 
 
 The Vowel next but one before (or third from) the 
 Accented vowel of a word is generally dropped (if it can be 
 so dropped) when the word is increased in length by the 
 appendage of an additional syllable, — 
 
 And (B) For explanations of some forms in accordance with 
 this Rule, — 
 
 we may refer to the Exerc.-book (§ 59, pp. 37 & 38).] 
 
NOUN-FORMS. — 7^2. HI 
 
 N.B. (i) Some Nouns which are apparently of the form 7^3 
 are not so really and do not belong to the Declension in I (a) 
 at all. For instance, ^HPl a smith or artificer, and £JH2 a horse- 
 man, belong to a Class of forms having Dagesh F. in their 2 d 
 Root- letter (such as 135 a thief), and the — of their 1 st Root- 
 letter stands in the place of ' — followed by Dagesh.' Such 
 a — , in place of ' — followed by Dagesh,' is not dropped* like 
 that of the 1 st Root-letter in I (a) [on page 109], but remains 
 unchanged. Thus the Construct form of KHP1 is EHPl # and the 
 Plural is D*BhH • and so the Plural of BH3 is Mhfi — etc. 
 
 V T T 9 VT T V* T T > 
 
 (ii) Nouns of 7^3 form as above are mi-Vrd i.e. ' accented on 
 the last syllable ' [Note (*) on page 17 above]. There are several 
 other Classes of forms mi-Vra. There are also several Classes 
 of forms mi-Vel i.e. 'accented on the penultima' [Note (t) on 
 page 17 above], — thus the forms 7^3 (or 7^3 or 7^3), 7^3 
 (or hVB), and hvh or hvh). 
 
 (iii) The forms of the Plural are the same in (II.) as in (I.). 
 
 II. (a) The 7^3 form. Take, for example Tpl2 a king. 
 
 Singular *=|?£ a king, 'i.e.' the same {viz.) "=]?$ king of. 
 thy (m.) king 
 
 my king *37£ 
 
 thy (/.) king \^D 
 
 his king ^r?P 
 
 her king ^rr?P 
 
 I thy (m.) kings ^^P his kings ^/P 
 
 my kings ^2/12 lJ.I _L/_ 
 
 i your (m.) king M37& their (m.) k. Df?? 
 
 our king )^2/l2 '{ l_ 
 
 l " : " lyowr (/.) king \2f7l2 their (/.) £. \fp 
 
 Plural E*j?£ kings, * i.e.' ^/'P /foVzys <?/. 
 
 ^y (m.) kings ^^/P kis kings 
 
 thy if.) kings ^J^ her kings Vff& 
 
 l \your(m.) /angs^-P-T^ti their (m.) k. ErV37p 
 our kings^27l2\ ( f 
 
 l " T : \your (/.) &wys t?'??P their (/.) /I. |[T??P 
 
 [Tab. X. 1.] 
 
 Obs. In these Plural forms the 12 has — ; except when the 
 
 * See Exercise-book § 55 (£) [page 34]. 
 1 In Pause J t|— . 2 In Pause ; "Sfl — . 3 In Pause ', \— 
 
112 
 
 NOUN-FORMS 
 
 s.— nSya. 
 
 next letter has — , in which case the tH takes a 'Slight '-vowel 
 (as said in § 56). The 'Slight '-vowel here is — (i.e. the De- 
 clension-vowel* of the Singular). 
 
 (/3) The corresponding Feminine form Tr?V&. Take, for 
 
 it : - 
 
 example, H3 7J& « <7«eew. 
 
 Singular ^5?^ a gweew, 'i.e.' ^7^ ?«^« <?/. 
 
 my </m. 
 
 o«r (/m. 
 
 toS& 
 
 urdta 
 
 /«'s <7^^w 
 
 
 thy if.) queen ^P??^ ^ r queen 
 your (m.) qu. MrvSPtt £/^> (?%.) <^. DH2 7^3 
 yowr (f.) qu. 
 Plural HIpSp 
 
 tor (/.) qu. IP?7? 
 
 »??/ <7W. 3 
 
 *nb?& 
 
 o?<r 
 
 ?«. wnb7ft 
 
 queens, i.e. 
 thy(m.)qu. TW^ 
 % (/.) 0M. »'^!JOT 
 
 your(m.)qu. ^^T^P 
 your (/.) y«. 13*^/? 
 
 rtJ?2D 
 
 queens of. 
 
 his queens 
 her queens 
 
 it : - 
 
 (orjnbSp 
 
 [Tab. XII. 1.] 
 
 Obs. In the Plural here also the fo has — ; except when 
 the next letter has — , in which case the Jb takes a ' Slight '- 
 vowel (as in § 56). The ' Slight '-vowel here is — (i.e. the 
 Decl.- Vowel in II. (a), or the Vowel of the ft in the Singular 
 
 (7) Some Nouns of the form "tyS (and N.B. the ?tf3 form 
 has the same Declension) have — , and some have — ,f in the 
 place of the — of the 1 st Root-letter in (II, a). Thus, 
 
 * This is so generally. For some ' Variations ' see ' Note IV. (2) ' Tab. X. on 
 [page x* of Tables in Exercise-book]. 
 
 t This is specially so when the 1st Koot-letter is n, as in (ii) on page 113. 
 1 In Pause l^. 2 In Pause {"a* — 3 In Pause Ptt- 
 
 '" IT 
 
noun-forms.— ^3 Stf£ • nStfS H^S 113 
 
 v iv > ••• <••• > v.t : • > it : v * 
 
 (i) From TT3 or T73 a ww ('i.e.' the same) the forms are 
 
 ;rn ^vn^rp /r-TUjiTpj singular 
 .im? /ijn?) 03*7*73 /jtj|) trn? j Tg or *n fc 
 
 /TO ,( 2 TTI?) fTB # 0J , TI3) VTO j Plural. 
 
 t vrr$ /I3TT1? (B^T!* ,(10*Tp) Bjrn? j ^tfp ^? 
 
 So ^lSD « &00&, gives i^lDD ^^iSD etc. 
 
 (ii) From D7PI ^Mwtf or portion (i.e. the same) the forms are 
 
 ,T&? /^fol^O / n E?^)^D) Singular 
 
 ♦W$?n / (]^pSn)D^pSn /]n<pSn)Dn^Sn j a.c. fc g*j) D'pbn 
 
 (iii) So also there is sometimes — , and sometimes — , in place 
 of the — of 1 st Hoot-letter in (/3) — i.e. in the Feminine ' Form 
 and Declension' on page 112. — Thus, in the forms rP^S and 
 7r?V% and the corresponding Declensions, as in (a) & (b) 
 following, viz. 
 
 (a) From nHlSt^ a woman-servant (i.e. HnSt^) the forms are 
 
 In the Singular, inHSt? & ^mSB^ etc. ; and 
 
 In the Plural (Mihfi^, i.e. ninSE>), WhfiJ? & *fnhfi0 
 
 etc. 
 
 (b) From Hp?!"! a portion, afield, (i.e. HpA 1 !), the forms are 
 In the Singular, ijlppfl & ^Hp/Pl etc. ; and 
 
 In the Plural (HijpSn i.e. nipSlI), VjTpbn etc. 
 
 1 In Pause {t|— . 2 In Pause {"ip — 3 In Pause f— . 
 
114 noun-forms. — 7^b M7V3 
 
 V I > it : t • 
 
 III. (a) The ?yb form. Take, for example, fcJHh « month. 
 Singular BHH a month, ' i.e.' the same (viz. &*}?} month of) 
 thy (m.) month x J 
 thy (f) month 
 your (m.) month E-^KHri 
 
 my month ^fcJHn 
 
 his month ^rjO 
 
 her month ^J?] v 
 MezV (w2.) month ^"JO 
 ^ew* (y.) morcM ^"JO 
 
 Plural B^ltJ »mw»*&i 'i.e.' *KHn morals of. 
 
 • \ thy (m.)months' r VVy*m.\ his months ' 5 10 
 ?n?/ months zw*]n j 
 
 v ~ T T: J %(/.)«»0rc^a^!gHn | for »w»*As CT73 
 
 ow month !|32^*|h 
 
 lyoz^r (y.) month ]2 
 
 tffosr (m.) w. E^TIO 
 
 o»r months ^LVfcSHPl v ' . ' # 
 
 "' TT: |y^r(/.)w. 1JW.0 
 [Comp. Tab. XI.] 
 
 (/3) The corresponding Feminine form is 117^3. Take, for 
 
 example, PlST-H a desolation. 
 
 Singular '"'•■HO a desolation, 'i.e.' ^Tf) desolation of. 
 
 my d. TO^ri 
 
 l * T : T I thy (/.) d. 
 
 our d. ansnn 
 
 3/0 wr (y.) «?. 
 
 /«s to?/. ^O?H0 
 
 her desol. ^OfHO 
 
 their (m.) d. &£?H0 
 their (f.) d. 
 
 Plural fi^lO desolations, ' i.e.' ^"jO . 
 
 my d. 
 
 TOtl 
 
 thy (m.) d. 
 thy </.) rf. 
 
 /«S (5?. 
 for fl?. 
 
 ourd. wronn 
 
 : T{P10 
 
 . J 
 
 ?A?wr (w.) <f. M JrD"in their (m.)d. 
 your (f) d. t^O^O tifetr (/.) rf. 
 
 vnnin 
 
 *.T : T 
 
 # 
 
 orCni"}n 
 or]nhnn 
 
 I tv •• : t 
 
 * The v tinder the 1 st Root-letter here is S. 
 
 1 In Pause l^—. 2 In Pause 5^—. 
 
 3 In Pause i 1 " 
 
NOUN-FORMS. — A, E, I, AND 6 DECLENSIONS. 115 
 
 [Obs. (a) It may be useful to designate as an ' d-Declension ' 
 the Declension- form /VB i /^3 etc., in (II, a) on p. Ill ; — 
 and as an ' e-Declension ' the Declension-form ;ty3 ) 7^3, etc. 
 in (11,7- ii); and as an 'z-Declension' the Declension-form 7!?3 
 or 7^3 i^V3 etc., in (II, <y. i) ; — and as an 'd-Declension' 
 the Decl.-form ^3, W3, etc, (the — of the '3' being d), 
 in (III, a). 
 
 (b) There may be — in place of the — of 7^3 and — ~ 
 & — r in place of the — — of 7^3 by reason of 
 one of the letters y PI H , — as in 171T seed (which has the 
 ' — ' or ' d-Decl.' iVIT etc.), Tith doctrine (which has the ' — ' 
 or ' S-Decl.' Dip?, etc.), ")5p a boy (which has the '—'or 
 'd-Decl.' )^, JlM, etc.), *W dawn (which has the ' — ' or 
 'd-Decl.' \yW? t etc.), pQj height (which has the ' d-Decl.' iniS, 
 etc.), t13 work (which has the 'd-Decl.' iS^3, ^3, etc.). 
 
 (c) The d-Declension may be said to include what might be 
 called an d-Declension, inasmuch as a few Nouns of 7^3 (or 
 7^3) form have Decl. -forms with — as, for instance, i¥ftp 
 from Yl2p , See also the latter part of Note (*) on Tab. XI. 
 
 (d) We may perhaps mention here that some Nouns of 7^3 
 (or vVh) form take — d under the 1 st Root-letter in their 
 Plural forms (and some take — under a Nox-Guttural even). 
 Thus, from KHp we have the Plural form D^uHp (and p in 
 the same with !"! prefixed), etc. See also Note (f) on Tab. XI. 
 —See Note (§) on Tab. XI for forms from ^HX, Plural D*rTlfc 
 
 (e) Some Nouns, although not having Pi or any other 
 
 Feminine ending in the Singular, have the Feminine fii — 
 (or IT— ) form of Plural. Thus XD¥ a host has the Feminine- 
 
 S. , IT T 
 
 Plural form niXl¥ hosts, and so V1X earth or a land has Plural 
 ni¥^X lands, pi a threshing-floor has Plu. rYO^il threshing-floors, 
 
 \ t -: I vv. " n it: 
 
 etc. — Such Plurals are declined like Hlpl^ in (/3) page 109. 
 
 * The Vowel of the 2<i Root-letter is a ' Slight '-Vowel in place of the Com- 
 pound-Shva, because the 3d Root-letter here has Shva (§ 56). 
 
116 TABLE OF PLURALS OF NOUN-FORMS (on pp. 109-114). 
 
 (/) Some Feminine Nouns have the Masc. form of Plural. 
 Thus, PHOT a bee has the Plural D^ilH bees. And 
 
 it : v.- : 
 
 (g) Some Nouns have both forms of Plural (Exerc.-bk. § 45).] 
 
 The following little Table may be useful — exhibiting the 
 sameness of Plural form in the case of several Classes of 
 Singular forms [(A) Masc., (B) Fern.] : — 
 
 (A) Masculine forms. 
 Plural. Singular. 
 
 r [as in I (a) page 109] ?$?fi 
 
 B^fi . . . , < 
 
 ir t : * * • / i 
 
 (I) 
 
 (II) 
 
 (^or,^ r)% 
 (*# 3 or) Ws 
 
 bvh or) hyh *(iii) 
 
 (B) Feminine forms. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 r 
 
 Singular. 
 
 (rfate &) rte 
 
 (i) 
 
 ni^s . . . a 
 
 It: ' 4 
 
 I 
 
 (pte or) nbys^ 
 
 nSyst t(ii) 
 nbys 
 
 (nffflt &) nWst t(iii) 
 
 x u t: t ' it : t 
 
 * For some little 'Variations' in Plural forms of these see above [Note (d) on 
 page 115],— also Tab. XI. (Notes % & §). 
 
 t See Exerc.-book § 66 & 67 [page 40], and § 68 [page 41]. 
 \ The — of the is* Root-letter here is 8. 
 
SOME DUAL FORMS. 
 
 117 
 
 Dual forms of Nouns in I, II, III, — on pp. 109, 111, 114. 
 
 As remarked above (page 108) some Nouns have a Dual form, 
 for which the special ending is iD* . 
 
 (a) The Dual of a StfS form is «D*Wfi. Thus, 
 
 M3 a icing, Dual »D*£)33 wings, ' i.e.' *333 • and, w. Pron.-Affs., 
 
 utt ■ v- t : K— : - J 
 
 thy (m.) wings *| ~?f his wings ' »33 
 
 £/«/ (y.) wings **^?^^| for T&iw^s Tr?^? 
 
 my ww<7s 3*533 
 
 o?<r wmgra 13*1)33 
 
 y<9wr (w.) w. ED^-S 
 
 their (m.) w. ^333 
 ?foir (/.) w. EP8J? 
 
 our feet 
 
 whn 
 
 your {/.) w. I*?*??^ 
 
 08) The Dual of a SVS) or ^3 form is iD^fi or '^3. Thus, 
 ^"l afoot, Dual iD^3V«?f, 'i-c' ^31 • and, with Pron.-Affs., 
 
 v vv v S ™ v.- : - > 
 
 J, thy (m.) feet ^1 /iis/ed 1*^1 
 
 thy (f) feet »T$f] for/e^ £7?] 
 
 your {m.) feet ^'7^] \ their (m.) feet tty??] 
 
 (7) The Dual of ^3 or h$h form is »df#S* or 'y3* ; Thus, 
 |Sh «.M Dual WteT}* fists, ' i.e.' *3|&n* ; and, w. Pron.-Affs., 
 
 3*3sn x^TMjn) TJsn (msm V33n* 
 
 \.- : t / > I ■ \.- ; t ' I w : t / x t iv : t ' ^t ; t 
 
 . W3Sn (p^SH) D3»33n (jmSPl) DiT3Sn* 
 
 v : t / x kv ••: t ' vv •• : t / v kv •■ : t' vv " : t 
 
 This long ' Note on Noun-forms ' would be too long if we 
 were to attempt to give more here now than the two following 
 Declensions of (1) a 7V13 and (2) a P1V3 form. [Sec next page.] 
 
 * The -7- of the 1 st Root-letter here is 5. 
 
 1 In Pause 5D* — 2 In Pause 5"a* — 
 
 • IT '• |T 
 
 s In Pause {*- 
 
118 noun-forms. — Syis <& riyb. 
 
 (1) The 7J3 form. Take, for example, *\fo)$ a preserver. 
 Sing. *)$& a preserver, 'i.e.' the same; — and, with Pron.-AfFs., 
 
 my p. 
 
 n&ier 
 
 £% (m.) p. 
 thy if.) p. 
 
 •Sptftf 
 
 his preserver 
 her preserver 
 
 our p. XtftM 
 
 your (m.) p. ttFlfiW I their (m.) p. 
 
 your {/.) p. 
 
 their if.) p. 
 
 trpStf 
 
 Plural D*lbtej»w»wr«, 'i.e.' npi# — and, with Pron.-Affs., 
 
 my p. 3^7/bit^ 
 
 o^^. ttnate> 
 
 /«s preservers ""TolE^ 
 /^r preservers £l \J^ 
 their (m.) p. Dfi*Tb1$ 
 their (f.) p. Rl*TbW 
 
 my maker 
 
 our maker 
 
 ™y 
 
 thy(m.)p. f^? 1 ^ 
 thy(f.)p. *X$f& 
 your (m.) p. u^^jD)^ 
 your {/.) p. \yiti® 
 (2) The form H^b. Take, for example, nbty # maker. 
 Singular p||5ty a w«/i-(?r, 'i.e.' PlBty; — and, with Pron.-Affs., 
 
 ^|V | thy (/.) ma/^r ^ |fa* wa/fc^ l^ 
 
 your (m.) m. ^WV \ their (m.) maker E^tf 
 
 Plural D* 1 ^ makers, ' i.e.' *2>J? ; — and, with Pron.-Affs., 
 
 thy (m.) makers ^^V I /w's makers V&V 
 
 thy if.) makers 2 ^] J&V \ her makers ^T^V 
 
 your (m.) m. Ejwy £/^> ( w .) makers ^[}^V 
 your if.) m. ]^^V \ their {/.) makers ][}^V 
 
 * (i) The — of the 2d Eoot-letter here is a ' Slight '-vowel, in place of the — 
 because the next letter has Shva here, (ii) "When the 2 d Eoot-letter is one of the 
 four VnriN, there is — for the Moving-Shva under it and — as the' Slight '- 
 vowel in place of the -7 here [Comp. ' Appx. (B) to Tab. IX' (5)]. 
 
 t The -in ^r form is the usual one for the 3 s.m. Pron.-AfL with Nouns in H — . 
 The ') — form is comparatively rare with these Nouns. 
 
 J This form occurs in the case of !"INI~I, in '"N") my seer (= one seeing me). The 
 ^j) — form is properly for the Objective me (as in " one making me"), for which there 
 is '3 ^r in ^N"! Is. xlvii. 10 (one seeing me). 
 a In Pause J^tflB?. » In Pause :?|— . 2 In Pause tip—. 3 i n p ause ji— . 
 
 my makers z s ffly 
 our makers WWO 
 
REFERENCES. 119 
 
 [The following References to the Exercise-book may be 
 useful : — 
 
 For the pointing of the prefixes (i) 1, (ii) 7 3 3, (iii) D, 
 (iv) n, see pages 1-6 of the Exercise-book. 
 
 For the Personal Pronouns see pages 9 & 10, and Tab. I. 
 
 For Pronoun- Affixes attached to (1) 3, (2) h, (3) 3, (4) 12, 
 see Tab. II. and the ' Notes ' thereon. 
 
 For Pron.-Affs. attached to (1) HX (Objective), (2) HN with, 
 (3) UV with, see Tab. III. 
 
 For Pron.-Affs. attached to (1) Sx to, (2) hv on, see Tab. IV. 
 
 For ' various forms ' of such Pron.-Affs., — see Tab. VIII. 
 [Declension-forms of Nouns with Pronoun- Affixes.] 
 
 For 7^3 forms, see Tab. IX. 
 
 For some Variations in Declension-forms of 7^3 words, see 
 Notes on Tab. IX. 
 
 For 7JJ3 forms, and some others, see ' App x (A) to Tab. IX ' 
 and Notes thereon. 
 
 For 7V1S forms, and 7^^12*, and some others, — see 'App x 
 (B) to Tab. IX.' 
 
 * (i) The O here is • Preformative,' or a ' Form-prefix' before the 1st Root- 
 letter, as in 2PDO writing (fr. Hoot 2rD), t23C'D judgment (fr. Hoot t3QB>), etc. 
 The corresponding Feminine form is n^USD, as in HJDrvO war. For the Declen- 
 
 trf s T ' ,t t : • 
 
 sion of this form, in the Singular, the Decl. of the IV^SO form is used [comp. (Q 
 on page x** of Tables]. 
 
 (ii) A few other letters as ' Form-prefixes' occur; vis. ti as in DiE^X a lattice 
 (fr. 2JB>), VlSt"^ a cluster (fr. Root ^3P),etc.,— and » as in ~in>*? oil (fr.Root "lilX), 
 etc., — and F\ in VP/F) a disciple, etc. — The use of H as ' Form-prefix,' as in nWDEJ'n 
 a hearing (fr. Root yj3K>) , and a few others, is rare in Biblical but very common in 
 post-Biblical Hebrew. 
 
 (iii) The last-mentioned Noun has an added termination IV — ; so fl-1 7" in 
 JV3")FI increase (fr. Root i"l21). So some have IV — as in JV"1S| brimstone{ix. Root 
 *13J) and 0^3© perfection (fr. Eoot fTO). Also 
 
 (iv) Some Nouns have the added termination | jr , as J^?3 a furnace (fr. Root 
 K'33) ; and fl — as in fnpn deficiency (fr. Root "ID!"!), etc. 
 
 (v) The letters which are so used as ' Formative ' letters, in the case of Noun- 
 forms, have sometimes been classed in the Mnemonic form "PDJDNn (which is read 
 thus, VWOSn he- p mantiv). 
 
120 REFERENCES (CONTINUED). 
 
 For POVS) forms, and some others, — and for some Variations 
 in Decl.-forms of TOVB words, — see 'App x (C) to Tab. IX' 
 and Notes thereon. 
 
 For 7^3 forms, etc., see Tab. X. 
 
 For 7^b forms, etc., see Tab. XI. 
 
 For rWS PlWs and P17V3 forms, see Tab. XII. 
 
 For some variations in 7^3 & /Vh forms, etc., see Notes on 
 Tabs. X-XII (especially on pp. x* & x** of Tabs.). 
 
 For Decl.-forms of words ending in ft— — {& D— — ), — 
 and for a few remarks on TTC NtDfl W 7¥ VW *W ^h — 
 see page x** of Tabs. 
 
 For some forms of words ending in 1"V|— & IY~ see Note (f) 
 on page x** of Tabs. 
 
 For Decl.-forms of BW ^3 ^7H etc., see page 40 of 
 Exerc.-book. 
 
 For Decl.-forms of 3X HK JV3 p M3 H3 see Tab. XIII. 
 
 Some important forms are given in the Notes on Tab. XIII. 
 
 For the unaccented ending H~ see pp. 41 & 42 (§§ 70 & 71). 
 
 For the Relative Pronoun ^X wAo or which, see pp. 21-24. 
 For the Pronouns HT */ms (m.), HNT ^«s (/.), HpX these 
 
 (m. & /.), as used in such expressions as " this is — ," 
 
 " these are — ," see page 28 ; but 
 For the same used Adjectivally as in " this thing," " these 
 
 things," etc., see pages 58 & 59 (after 'Adjectives'). 
 For the Interrogative Pronouns *jb who ?, T\f2 (or lift or 
 
 H/b) what ?, see page 29. 
 For Adjectives see pages 50-55. 
 For Numerals see pages 62-68. 
 
 Verb-forms are dealt with and illustrated on pages 69-220, 
 and in Tables XIV-XXXI.] 
 
OTHER VOICE-FORMS. 121 
 
 (D) Other Voice-forms. 
 
 Besides the Seven Voice-forms on pages 58-73 above, there 
 are some other forms which now and then occur. We may 
 mention what are called l Po-lel,'* 'Po-ldV* and 'JTithpo-ldl,'* 
 — mentioned in Hebrew form on page 175 of Exerc.-book. 
 
 Also 'Pil-pel' forms, as they are called [ib. (a, 1)] ; 
 * Pol-pal' forms, [ib. (a, 2)] ; and 
 'Hithpal-peV forms, [ib. (a, 3)]. 
 
 'Pi-pa? 'Po-pd,' and 'Hit/ipd-pd,' forms [ib. page 17G 
 
 03)]; 
 
 'Pi-lai; and 'Pii-ldl,' forms [ib. (8, a)] ; 
 'P-dl-d/; and 'PW-dl,' forms [ib. (8, b)\ 
 
 'Po-eV* (instead of Pi-el) forms [ib. (e, a)~\ ; 
 'Po-pheV* (instead of Pi-el) forms [ib. (e, b)~\ ; 
 'Pu-hl' (instead of Pti-dl) forms [ib. (e, c)~\ ; 
 l Tiph-W (instead of Hiph-il) forms [ib. p. 177 (e, r/)] ; 
 'Mixed' forms 'N'pho-aJ,' 'Nithpd-el,'' and 'Ilothpa-dV 
 forms [ib. (e, e)]. 
 
 The n of 'Hiph-i7,' and also that of 'ffithpti-Sl,' is sometimes 
 replaced by X [ib. page 177 (£)]. 
 
 There are words which by some are taken to have 'Quadri- 
 literal ' Roots, and by others are considered to be ' reducible to 
 three Root-letters,' or as 'Composite' [ib. page 177 (77)]. 
 
 Some forms may be said to be ' Compounded ' of two Ordinary 
 forms 'Mixed up together,' Comp. the passage translated from 
 Ben Zev's Grammar on pages 177 & 178 of the Exercise-book. 
 
 * N.B. The should be pronounced broadly — for the \. 
 
122 *| conversive. 
 
 (Note 7) 1 Conversive. 
 
 I. In the latter part of Note (*) on page 95, mention was 
 made of a " prefix 1 " That ) (bearing — and followed by 
 Dagesh) is not merely the ordinary prefix 1, which signifies 
 "and," "thus," etc. [Comp. Exerc.-bk. p. 1, Note (*)]. The 
 ' ordinary prefix 1 ' is not followed by Dagesh. The ' 1 bearing 
 — followed by Dagesh ' stands only before a Future Tense, 
 and has a special name. It was called by Hebrews *p£nn 1 
 [which is read ^ Vaiiv hd-M(p)-puk'] i.e. the "1 of the change," 
 — and so the terms ' 1 Conversivum ' and ' 1 Conversive ' have 
 come into use for it. The old term ' Vaiiv of the change ' 
 seems to us much the best name for it. But for practical pur- 
 poses ' Vaiiv Conversive ' will do. This latter term has been in 
 use for some time, and it is a more convenient expression than 
 ' The Yauv of the change ' — for which let it be supposed to 
 stand. 
 
 [The ' change ' ma} 7- be said to be ' a change of the point of 
 reference ' for Time of Action, — not, observe, an ' arrest of 
 progress,' but a ' change of the point with regard to whtch 
 the progress is estimated.' 
 
 Probably, however, the Student does not care to trouble 
 himself with this — which is therefore enclosed within brackets. 
 He would doubtless much rather have the matter illustrated by 
 an example or two, as follows] : — 
 
 (i) The Hebrew word for " [lie] shall reign " in 1 Kings i. 13, 
 & 24, & 30, etc., is Trbft* 3 s.m. Fut. Kal (as on p. 59) fr. "[7^ ; 
 and the same word with the prefix ) bearing — followed by 
 Dagesh becomes *17p*^ which is the Hebrew word for " and [he] 
 reigned" in 1 Kings' xi. 25 & 43, xiv. 31, xv. 8 & 24 & 28, 
 xvi. 22, etc., etc. 
 
 (ii) So the Hebrew word for " [he] shall call" in Gen. xlvi. 33 
 is JOD 1 * 3 s.m. Fut. Kal (as on page 61, but with — in the 
 ' Open ' syllable ^7 here in place of the — of the ' Closed ' 
 syllable 6J^3 there — Comp. Exerc.-book, p. 185, Obs. XXIII) 
 fr. tOp; and the same word with the prefix 1 bearing — 
 
1 CONVERSIVE. NAMES OF THE TENSES. 123 
 
 followed by Dagesh becomes K^p*l which is the Hebrew- 
 word for " and he called " in Gen. xlvii. 29, etc. 
 
 (iii) So the Hebrew word for " Thus hath taken away," 
 and that for "and hath given," in Gen. xxxi. 9, are also 
 such forms with this 'prefix 1 bearing — followed by 
 Dagesh.' [The Hebrew words without this prefix stand, 
 the first one for " He shall deliver " in 2 Kings xvii. 39,* 
 and the second one for "he shall give" in Ex. xxi. 32, etc.]. 
 Multitudes of such examples might easily be given. But 
 those above are sufficient to enable the Student to see to some 
 extent why this prefix has been called ' 1 Conversive.' f 
 
 II. "We may add that the name "1 Conversive' is often used 
 also for the 1 (the ordinary prefix) when prefixed to a Past- 
 Tense — as in T|£D1 and he shall put Lev. i. 4 (3 s.w. Past Kal 
 with 1) ; and so in tariEh and he shall kill Lev. i. 5, and in a 
 vast number of other instances. 
 
 "We may not say more on this matter here. The Rules will 
 be found on pages 100-102 of the Exercise-book. 
 
 (Note Jb) The Names of the Hebrew Tenses. 
 
 "Much strange confusion and misapprehension have been 
 introduced by some in regard to the usage of the Hebrew 
 Tenses" — is a remark which we have ventured to make on 
 this subject in § 149 of the Exercise-book. 
 
 There are but two ' Tenses ' or ' TiME-forms ' in Hebrew, and 
 these have for ages been thought (and by many Hebrew Scholars 
 are still thought) to have reference to the two great main 
 divisions of time, viz. the Past and the Future (between which 
 the Present is strictly but an everchanging instant — Comp. 
 page 98 of the Exercise-book). 
 
 Some few years ago the opinion was started that the second 
 of the two Hebrew Tenses mentioned above should be called 
 
 * For the difference of form of the word with and without that prefix, see 
 Exerc.-book, page 222 (2). 
 
 t Some Moderns wish to call it otherwise — as '1 Consequuliviim,' ~\<it\i whose 
 opinion we are quite unable to agree. 
 
1*24 NAMES OF THE TENSES. 
 
 the * Present ' * instead of ' Future.' So it was the fashion for 
 a time to call the Tense the 'Present.' That fashion may 
 safely be said to have now passed away, although it was (and 
 is still) tenaciously held by some distinguished Persons of high 
 consideration and authority. Others have preferred the opinion 
 that the Tense is some ' Indefinite form ' which may be rendered 
 indefinitely (not to say "anyhow"). The form in which this 
 opinion was held may also now be said to have passed or at 
 least to be passing away. Another opinion now is more 
 fashionable : — viz. to call this Tense an ' Imperfect,' f instead of 
 * Future,' (and to call the other Tense * Perfect ' instead of 
 ' Past ' £). The name has been cleverly devised for getting over 
 rather than dealing with thoroughly a somewhat important set 
 of the circumstances of the case. It is not satisfactory : but 
 we must allow that it is in fashion just at present. "We are 
 not able to adopt the name: and we think the fashion one 
 of the passing fashions of the day [Comp. the latter part of 
 Note (£) on page 46 above]. Those who wish to adopt the 
 fashion must of course be allowed the full liberty to do so if 
 they please, — and those may for convenience sake be called 
 
 ' Imperfect ' Scholars. 
 
 And as we doubt not that Scholars of the time to come, in 
 Future, will agree with the Hebrew Scholars of Past ages in 
 regarding the two Hebrew Tenses as the Past and Future 
 Tenses, so we need have no hesitation in speaking of these as the 
 
 Scholars of the -Past' and the 'Future.' 
 
 * In Hebrew, Present action is expressed by a Participle tbus : — "A man is 
 visiting" is represented by the Hebrew word for " a man " and the Hebrew Parti- 
 ciple for " one (»«.) visiting.''' Comp. § 124 at foot of page 72 of Exerc.-book. 
 
 t In the sense of ' unfinished] — for unfinished action. 
 
 \ Some use the term ' Preterite ' instead of ' Past.' "We very much prefer the 
 term ' Past,' viz. the short English equivalent of the Latin word ' prateritum,' to the 
 long Anglicised form of the Latin word —viz. preterite. 
 
INDEX. 
 
 PAGE 
 
 Accents, Introductory remarks on, ... ... ... 15 — 19 
 
 „ on some syllables regularly ... 17, 26, 78, 111 
 
 (See also Tables in the Exercise-book) 
 
 „ Table of, ... ... ... ... 42—44 
 
 Adjectives, (Reference to Exercise-book for) ... ... 120 
 
 Aleph ... ... ... 1, 3, 4 [2) , 13, 30 (Note), 33 
 
 ,, at end of some Verb-forms, Eeference given for, ... 103 
 
 „ Quiescent, ... ... .. ... 12, 13 
 
 „ Verbs Laving, as 1st Letter ... ... ... 94, 95 
 
 „ Verbs having, as 3rd Letter, see Chart opposite to p. 99. 
 Alphabet ... ... ... ... ... 3 
 
 B'GAD— K'PHATH Letters ... ... ... 20 
 
 ' Characteristic' Dagesh of Pi-el and Pii-al ... ... 86 
 
 „ „ Dagesh of Hithpa-el ... ... 91 
 
 „ ,, Nun of Niph-al ... ... ... 82 
 
 Chart of certain ' leading Verb-forms,' opposite to page ... 99 
 
 ,, General plan of, ... ... ... ... 97 
 
 „ Notes on, ... ... ... ... 99, 99*, 99** 
 
 Compensation for Dagesh ... ... 80, 82, 85, 86, 88, 89, 91 
 
 Compound Shva ... ... ... ... 10, 11, 80 
 
 „ „ always Moving ... ... ... 10 
 
 ,, „ under 4 letters ... ... ... 11 
 
 „ ,, under other letters sometimes ... ... 47, 48 
 
 Conjugation of a Verb ... ... ... ... 58 — 73 
 
 ' Construct '-forms ... ... ... 56, 57, 110, etc. 
 
 Dagesh ' Conjunctivum,' ' Dirimens,' ' Euphonic,' ' Forte-Euphoni- 
 
 cum,' ' Intermediate.' ... ... ... 46 
 
 Dagesh-Forte ... ... ... ... ... 21, 22 
 
 „ „ can stand only after a vowel ... ... 22 
 
 „ „ for an omitted Root-letter 70, 98, etc., and Chart 
 
 „ „ for Characteristic Nun of Niph-al ... ... 82 
 
 „ „ not received by some letters 21, 22, 80, 82, 83, 86, 91 
 
12G INDEX. 
 
 PAGE 
 
 Dagesh-Forte, The Letters which do not receive, 21, 22, 80, 82, 86 
 „ „ often omitted over Shva .. . ... 37 (Note) 
 
 Dagesh-Lene ... ... ... ... ... 20, 21 
 
 „ „ cannot stand after Shva Moving, or after a Vowel 20, 22 
 „ „ omitted in certain cases at beginning of a word 20, 21 
 
 Declension of (an unchanging) Masc. Noun with Pron. Affs. 56 
 
 „ „ of (an unchanging*) Fern. Noun with Pron. -Affs. 57 
 
 „ „ of certain Noun-Forms with Pron.- Affs. 109 — 118 
 
 Defective Long-Kherik and Shurik ... ... ... 6 
 
 Diacritic point, (so-called) ... ... ... ... 32 
 
 Dropping of the first of two ' same '-letters and its representation 
 
 by Dagesh ... ... ... ... 70 
 
 Dual ... ... ... ... ... ... 108, 117 
 
 Form-Prefix letters ... ... ... 119 (Note) 
 
 Furtive-Pathakh ... ... ... ... 32 
 
 ' Future-Khoulem ' Verbs ... ... ... ... 60 
 
 ' Future-Pathakh ' Verbs ... ... ... ... 60 
 
 Future Kal of a Verb < Fut.-Khoulem ' ... ... 59 
 
 Future Kal of a Verb < Fut.-Pathakh ' ... ... 61 
 
 He at end of Iraper. and Fut. Kal forms ... ... 60, 61 
 
 „ at end of Imper. and Fut. forms Hithp. ... ... 74 
 
 ,, at end of Imper. and Fut. in other Voices ... 63, 65, etc. 
 
 ,, at end of some other Verb forms ... ... ... 103 
 
 He Quiescent .. ... ... ... ... 12,13 
 
 ,, when not Quiescent at end of a word has Mapper ... 14 
 
 Hupn-AL forms (for Hoph-al) ... ... ... 70 
 
 Imperative Kal of a Verb ' Fut.-Khoulem'' ... ... 59 
 
 Imperative Kal of a Verb ' Fut.-Pathakh ' .. ... 61 
 
 Kaumets, Meaning of the name, ... ... ... 39 — 42 
 
 „ Pronunciation of, ... ... 4 (6) , 4 (6) 
 
 Kaumets-Khautuph 4, 6, 27, 58, 60, 70, 78, 114, 115, 116, 117 
 
 Khoulem ' Full ' and ' Deficient ' ... ... ... 4,6 
 
 Kibbuts sometimes in form of Shurik ... ... ... 6 
 
 „ The usual form of, sometimes used for Shurik ... 6 
 * i. e. Except as regards Termination. 
 
INDEX. 127 
 
 PAGE 
 
 < Kr! ' and ' Kthiv ' ... ... ... ... 49—51 
 
 Long-Khirik, The usual form of, sometimes used for Short-Khirik 6 
 
 Makkjeph ... ... ... ... 15, 79, etc. 
 
 Mappek ... ... ... ... ... 14 
 
 Metheg ... ... ... ... ... 17 — 19 
 
 'MuTE'Yod ... ... ... .. ... 14 
 
 Names of the ' Voices ' ... ... ... ... 75,76 
 
 „ of the Vowels, Meaning of the, ... ... ... 38 — 42 
 
 Nun, added termination in some Nouns, ... 119 (Note) 
 
 ,, ' Characteristic ' of Niph-al ... ... ... 82 
 
 „ Final at end of some Verb forms ... ... 103 
 
 Pathakh ... ... ... ... 4, 82, 86, 90 
 
 „ Euphonic, (in places of a Shva, sometimes) 82, 86, 90 
 
 Pathakh, Furtive, — ... ... ... ... 32 
 
 „ in place of Tsay-re of Hithpa-el ... ... 73 
 
 Pau-el (or Pa-el) form of Participle (1), Kal, ... ... 77 
 
 „ form of Past-Tense, Kal, ... ... ... 76,104 
 
 Pau-oul (or Pa-ol) form of Participle (1), Kal, ... ... 79 
 
 „ form of Past-Tense, Kal, ... ... ... 78,104 
 
 Pause-forms ... ... ... ... 17, 103—107 
 
 „ „ sometimes when not in Pause ... ... 107 
 
 Personal Pronouns (Absolute forms) ... ... 55 
 
 ,, „ (Affix-forms for Nouns), ... ... 55, etc. 
 
 Preformative letters (for some Noun-forms) ... 119 (Note) 
 
 Pronoun- Affixes (attached to Nouns) ... ... 55 etc. 
 
 Replacing of Thdv of Hithpa-el by Teth when the First Root-letter 
 
 is Tsddi ... ... ... ... ... 92, 93 
 
 Resh in a Root, Variations in some Verb-forms because 
 
 of, ... ... ... ... 82,83,88,89 
 
 Root letters ... ... ... ... ... 74,75 
 
 Roots ... ... ... ... ... ... 74 
 
 Short-Khirik sometimes in form of Long- Khirik ... 6 
 
 „ ,, The usual form of, sometimes used for Long- Khirik 6 
 
 Shortening of a Long- Vowel into a Short one on removal of the 
 
 Accent ... ... 27, 31, 78, 95 (Note) 
 
128 INDEX. 
 
 PAGE 
 
 Shurik sometimes in the form of Kibbuts ... ... 6 
 
 ,, The usual form of, sometimes used for Kibbuts ... 6 
 
 Shva ... ... ... ... ... ... 1, 2, etc. 
 
 „ < Medium ' (of Dr. Ewald) ... ... ... 29,30 
 
 Shva-Movinq 
 
 Definition ... ... ... ... 9 
 
 Eules for ... ... ... 24, 25, 26, 28, 31 
 
 Shva-Quiescent 
 
 Definition ... ... ... ... 9 
 
 Eules for ... ... ... 24,25,26,31 
 
 Shva understood at end of a word under one vowelless letter, but 
 
 put under two such ... ... ... 2 
 
 « Slight '-Vowel ... 28, 29, 80, 81, 84, 91, 94, 110, 112 (2 ce ), 115, 
 (also on pp. 113, 114) 
 
 Termination-forms, Some, for Nouns ... 57, 108, 119 (Note) 
 
 Transposition of First Boot-letter with Tav of Hithpa-el in 
 
 some cases ... ... ... ... 92, 93 
 
 ' Variations ' in some Verb-forms, — from the Eoot having a 
 
 Guttural Letter in it, ... ... ... 79 — 92 
 
 < Variations,' Seven great Classes of, ... ... ... 96 
 
 „ „ Some, from the First Eoot-letter being n ... 94, 95 
 
 „ „ Two [of the Classes] of, at once ... ... 98 
 
 Vauv (or Vav) Consonantal except in Khoulem and Shurik 14 
 
 Vauv (or Vav) Conversive, — Note on ... ... 122, 123 
 
 VERB-forms ... ... ... ... ... 58—107 
 
 Verbs < Fut.-Khoulem ' ... ... ... ... 60 
 
 „ ■ Fut. -Pathakh' ... ... ... ... 60 
 
 VoiOE-forms, Ordinary, ... ... ... ... 76 
 
 „ „ Other, ... ... ... ... 121 
 
 „ „ [For Po-el and Po-al, see Exercise-Book pp. 365 — 368] 
 
 Yod at end of some Verb-forms, Eeference given for, ... 103 
 
 „ ' Compaginis ' (so-called by some) [see Exercise-book, page 232] 
 „ Consonantal except after Khirik and Segol and Tsay-re 14 
 
 „ Mute ... ... ... ... ... 14 
 
 „ Quiescent ... ... ... ... ... 12 — 14 
 
 "P 
 
RETV »» ro D li»AV VSE 
 
 »■ LOANt>7£ BORRo "*<> 
 
 to ^edia tereca , ] 
 
 13 
 
 _ ■■■• U^^br